This is MoDOT's Engineering Policy Guide Test Site. Do not use the information on this site. Click Here to access MoDOT's current Engineering Policy Guide.

903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B): Difference between revisions

From Engineering_Policy_Guide
Jump to navigation Jump to search
Smithk (talk | contribs)
HogsettC (talk | contribs)
 
(373 intermediate revisions by 7 users not shown)
Line 1: Line 1:
[[image:903.1 Extent of Signing.jpg|left|350px]]
[[Category:903 Highway Signing (MUTCD Part 2)|903.02]]
{| align="right" style="margin-left: 15px; max-width: 690px;"
| __TOC__
|}
=={{SpanID|903.2.1}}903.2.1  Application of Regulatory Signs (MUTCD Section 2B.01)==
 
'''Standard. '''Regulatory signs shall be used to inform road users of selected traffic laws or regulations and to indicate the applicability of the legal requirements.
 
Regulatory signs shall be installed at or near where the regulations apply. The signs shall clearly indicate the requirements imposed by the regulations and shall be designed and installed to provide adequate visibility and legibility in order to obtain compliance.
 
Regulatory signs shall be retroreflective or illuminated (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.21|EPG 903.1.21]]).
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.2}}903.2.2  Design of Regulatory Signs (MUTCD Section 2B.02)==
 
'''Standard. '''Regulatory signs shall be rectangular unless specifically designated otherwise in the EPG. Regulatory signs shall be designed in accordance with the sizes, shapes, colors, and legends contained in the FHWA “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911 General (MUTCD Part 1) #911.1.5|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]).
 
'''Support. '''The use of educational plaques to supplement symbol signs is described in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.9|EPG 903.1.9]].
 
The use of LEDs in the border or legend of regulatory signs is described in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]].
 
'''Standard. '''LED signs displaying a part-time prohibitory message incorporating a red circle and diagonal of a static sign shall display a red symbol that approximates the same red circle and diagonal as closely as possible. The symbol of the action to be prohibited shall be displayed in white LEDs on a black background.
 
A regulatory sign displayed entirely with LEDs and incorporated within the border of a larger full-matrix changeable message sign shall display the regulatory sign legend in the size, shape, color, and legend of the standard regulatory sign.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.3}}903.2.3  Size of Regulatory Signs (MUTCD Section 2B.03)==
 
'''Standard. '''Except as provided in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.7|EPG 903.1.7]], the minimum sizes for regulatory signs shall be as shown in [[#tab903.2.3|Table 903.2.3]].
 
'''Support. ''' [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.7|EPG 903.1.7]] contains information regarding the applicability of the various columns in [[#tab903.2.3|Table 903.2.3]].
 
'''Guidance. '''The minimum sizes for regulatory signs facing traffic on exit and entrance ramps at interchanges should be as shown in the column of [[#tab903.2.3|Table 903.2.3]] that corresponds to the mainline roadway classification (Expressway/Freeway).
 
'''Standard. '''The minimum size for WRONG WAY and DO NOT ENTER signs on ramps facing the opposite direction of travel where a road user could wrongly enter the ramp from a conventional road shall be the size listed in the Conventional Road - Standard column of [[#tab903.2.3|Table 903.2.3]].  See [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.37|EPG 903.2.37]] and [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.38|903.2.38]] for additional information.
 
'''Option. '''The minimum size for WRONG WAY and DO NOT ENTER signs on ramps facing the opposite direction of travel where a road user could wrongly enter the ramp from a conventional road may be increased to the size in the Conventional Road – Oversized column of [[#tab903.2.3|Table 903.2.3]] when the need for greater emphasis has been determined based on engineering judgement.


The extent of signing by contract on any project is determined early in the project scopeStructural guide signs and supports (overhead or ground-mounted) are paid for by contract, regardless of the type of facilitySheet signs and supports are supplied by contract for all route classifications and project conditionsUnless otherwise agreed to among departments or divisions, the following are general guidelines for the extent of contract signing.
{{SpanID|tab903.2.3}}
{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:1px; border:1px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#ffddcc" width="210px" align="right"  
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align: center"
|-
|+ Table 903.2.3, Regulatory Sign and Plaque Sizes
! rowspan="2" | Sign or Plaque
! rowspan="2" | Sign Designation
! rowspan="2" | EPG Article
! colspan="3" | Conventional Road (in. x in.)
! Freeway/Expressway (in. x in.)
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Standard
! Oversized
! Special
! Mainline and Ramps
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Stop
| R1-1
| [[#903.2.4|903.2.4]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
| 48 X 48
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Yield
| R1-2
| [[#903.2.5|903.2.5]]
| 48 X 48 X 48
| 60 X 60 X 60
| -
| 60 X 60 X 60
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  To Oncoming Traffic (plaque)
| R1-2aP
| [[#903.2.5|903.2.5]]
| 36 X 30
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  All-Way (plaque)
| R1-3P
| [[#903.2.4|903.2.4]]
| 30 X 12
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Yield Here To Pedestrians
| R1-5
| [[#903.2.18|903.2.18]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Yield Here to Trail Crossing
| R1-5d
| [[#903.2.18|903.2.18]]
| 36 X 42
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  In-Street Pedestrian Crossing - Yield
| R1-6
| [[#903.2.19|903.2.19]]
| 12 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  In-Street Trail Crossing - Yield
| R1-6d
| [[#903.2.19|903.2.19]]
| 12 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Speed Limit
| R2-1
| [[#903.2.20|903.2.20]]
| 36 X 48
| 48 X 60
| -
| 48 X 60
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Combined Speed Limit
| R2-4a
| [[#903.2.21|903.2.21]]
| -
| -
| -
| 48 X 96
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Speed Limit _ Except Where Posted
| R2-5d
| [[#903.2.22|903.2.22]]
| 36 X 48
| -
| -
| 36 X 48
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Fines Doubled Ends
| R2-20
| [[#903.2.71|903.2.71]]
| 36 X 30
| -
| -
| 36 X 30
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  No Right Turn
| R3-1
| [[#903.2.24|903.2.24]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 24 X 24 - 30 X 30
| 48 X 48
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  No Left Turn
| R3-2
| [[#903.2.24|903.2.24]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 24 X 24 - 30 X 30
| 48 X 48
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  No Turns
| R3-3
| [[#903.2.24|903.2.24]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 24 X 24 - 30 X 30
| 36 X 36
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  No U Turn
| R3-4
| [[#903.2.24|903.2.24]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 24 X 24 - 30 X 30
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Right (Left/Ahead) Only
| R3-5, 5a
| [[#903.2.26|903.2.26]]
| 30 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Straight and Right (Left)
| R3-6
| [[#903.2.27|903.2.27]]
| 30 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Optional Movement U and Left Turn
| R3-6a
| [[#903.2.27|903.2.27]]
| 30 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Optional Movement Left Turns
| R3-6b
| [[#903.2.27|903.2.27]]
| 30 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Right (Left) Lane Must Turn Right (Left)
| R3-7
| [[#903.2.26|903.2.26]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Advance Intersection Lane Control
| R3-8,8a,8b,8xa, 8xb,8xc
| [[#903.2.28|903.2.28]]
| Varies X 30
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Two-Way Left Turn Only (overhead)
| R3-9a
| [[#903.2.29|903.2.29]]
| 30 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Center Lane Two-Way Left Turn Only (post-mounted)
| R3-9b
| [[#903.2.29|903.2.29]]
| 24 X 36
| 36 X 48
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  No U Turn/No Left Turn
| R3-18
| [[#903.2.24|903.2.24]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 24 X 24 - 30 X 30
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  No Straight Through
| R3-27
| [[#903.2.24|903.2.24]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 24 X 24 - 30 X 30
| 48 X 48
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Do Not Pass
| R4-1
| [[#903.2.31|903.2.31]]
| 36 X 48
|
| 36 X 48
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Pass With Care
| R4-2
| [[#903.2.32|903.2.32]]
| 36 X 48
|
| 48 X 60
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Slower Traffic Keep Right
| R4-3
| [[#903.2.33|903.2.33]]
| 36 X 48
| 48 X 60
| 48 X 60
| 48 X 60
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Keep Right
| R4-7
| [[#903.2.34|903.2.34]]
| 24 X 30
| 36 X 48
| 36 X 48
| 48 X 60
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Keep Right (horizontal arrow)
| R4-7a
| [[#903.2.34|903.2.34]]
| 36 X 48
| 48 X 60
| 48 X 60
| 48 X 60
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Keep Right (45° arrow)
| R4-7b
| [[#903.2.34|903.2.34]]
| 36 X 48
| 48 X 60
| -
| 84 X 96
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Narrow Keep Right
| R4-7c
| [[#903.2.34|903.2.34]]
| 18 X 30
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Keep Left
| R4-8
| [[#903.2.34|903.2.34]]
| 24 X 30
| 36 X 48
| -
| 48 X 60
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Keep Left (horizontal arrow)
| R4-8a
| [[#903.2.34|903.2.34]]
| 36 X 48
| 48 X 60
| -
| 48 X 60
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Keep Left (45° arrow)
| R4-8b
| [[#903.2.34|903.2.34]]
| 36 X 48
| 48 X 60
| -
| 84 X 96
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Narrow Keep Left
| R4-8c
| [[#903.2.34|903.2.34]]
| 18 X 30
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Keep Right Except to Pass
| R4-16
| [[#903.2.33|903.2.33]]
| 36 X 48
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Do Not Drive on Shoulder
| R4-17
| [[#903.2.35|903.2.35]]
| 36 X 48
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Next Passing Lane _ Miles
| R4-28
| [[#903.2.69|903.2.69]]
| -
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  End Passing Lanes
| R4-29
| [[#903.2.69|903.2.69]]
| -
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Do Not Enter
| R5-1
| [[#903.2.37|903.2.37]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
| 48 X 48
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Wrong Way
| R5-1a
| [[#903.2.39|903.2.39]]
| 42 X 30
| -
| -
| 42 X 30
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  No Trucks
| R5-2
| [[#903.2.36|903.2.36]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Except Local Deliveries (plaque)
| R5-2aP
| [[#903.2.36|903.2.36]]
| 36 X 18
| -
| -
|
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Engine Brake Muffler Required
| R5-23
| -
| 30 X 30
| -
| -
| 30 X 30
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  No Fishing from Bridge
| R5-25
| [[#903.2.36|903.2.36]]
| 18 X 24
| -
| -
| 18 X 24
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  No Dumping
| R5-28
| [[#903.2.66|903.2.66]]
| -
| -
| -
| 48 X 24
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Authorized and Emergency Vehicles Only
| R5-29
| [[#903.2.36|903.2.36]]
| -
| -
| -
| 24 X 30
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Do Not Stop on Tracks
| R5-31
| [[#903.2.45|903.2.45]]
| 24 X 30
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  One Way
| R6-1
| [[#903.2.40|903.2.40]]
| 36 X 12
| 48 X 18
| -
| 48 X 18
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  One Way
| R6-2
| [[#903.2.40|903.2.40]]
| 24 X 30
| 30 X 36
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Divided Highway (4-legged)
| R6-3
| [[#903.2.41|903.2.41]]
| 30 X 24
| -
| -
| 36 X 30
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Divided Highway (T-intersection)
| R6-3a
| [[#903.2.41|903.2.41]]
| 30 X 24
| -
| -
| 36 X 30
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  No Parking Signs
| R7 series
| [[#903.2.43|903.2.43]]
| 18 X 24
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Reserved Parking
| R7-8
| [[#903.2.43|903.2.43]]
| 18 X 24
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Van Accessible (plaque)
| R7-8aP
| [[#903.2.43|903.2.43]]
| 18 X 9
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  No Parking on Bridge
| R7-35
| [[#903.2.43|903.2.43]]
| 18 X 24
| -
| -
| 18 X 24
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  No Parking Trucks and Trailers Over 6 Tons
| R7-36
| [[#903.2.62|903.2.62]]
| 18 X 24
| 36 X 48
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Tow Away Zone (plaque)
| R7-201P, R7-201ap
| [[#903.2.43|903.2.43]]
| 18 X 9
| -
|
|
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  This Side of Sign (plaque)
| R7-202P
| [[#903.2.43|903.2.43]]
| 18 X 9
| -
| -
|
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Emergency Stopping Only
| R8-7
| [[#903.2.45|903.2.45]]
| 48 X 36
| -
| -
| 48 X 36
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  No Pedestrian Crossing (symbol)
| R9-3
| [[#903.2.46|903.2.46]]
| 18 X 24
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  No Pedestrian Crossing
| R9-3a
| [[#903.2.46|903.2.46]]
| 18 X 24
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Pedestrian Signal Series
| R10-3 & R10-4 series
| [[#903.2.47|903.2.47]]
| 9 X 15
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Left on Green Arrow Only
| R10-5
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 24 X 30
| 30 X 36
| -
| 30 X 36
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Stop Here on Red
| R10-6
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 24 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Do Not Block Intersection
| R10-7
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 24 X 30
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Right Turn Signal
| R10-10R
| -
| 30 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  No Turn on Red
| R10-11
| [[#903.2.49|903.2.49]]
| 30 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Left Turn on Green (Ball)
| R10-12
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 24 X 30
| 30 X 36
| -
| 30 X 36
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Left Turn Yield on Flashing Yellow Arrow
| R10-12a
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 24 X 30
| 30 X 36
| -
| 30 X 36
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Emergency Signal
| R10-13
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 36 X 24
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Emergency Signal Stop on Flashing Red
| R10-14
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 36 X 42
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Emergency Signal - Stop on Flashing Red (overhead)
| R10-14a
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 60 X 24
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Stop Here on Red
| R10-14b
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 24 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Turning Vehicles Yield to Pedestrians
| R10-15
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 30 X 30
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Traffic Signal Photo Enforced
| R10-18a
| [[#903.2.56|903.2.56]]
| 30 X 42
| 36 X 54
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Photo Enforced (symbol plaque)
| R10-19P
| [[#903.2.56|903.2.56]]
| 24 X 12
| 48 X 24
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Crosswalk - Stop on Red
| R10-23
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 24 X 30
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Stop on Red - Yield on Flashing Red After Stop
| R10-23a
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 24 X 30
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Push Button for Warning Lights - Wait for Gap in Traffic
| R10-25
| [[#903.2.47|903.2.47]]
| 9 X 12
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  XX Vehicles per Green
| R10-28
| [[#903.2.50|903.2.50]]
| 24 X 30
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  XX Vehicles per Green Each Lane
| R10-29
| [[#903.2.50|903.2.50]]
| 36 X 24
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Right Turn on Red Must Yield to U-Turn
| R10-30
| [[#903.2.49|903.2.49]]
| 30 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Right Turn Must Yield To U-Turn
| R10-30a
| [[#903.2.49|903.2.49]]
| 36 X 24
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Keep Off Median
| R11-1
| [[#903.2.51|903.2.51]]
| 48 X 60
| 48 X 60
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Road Closed
| R11-2
| [[#903.2.52|903.2.52]]
| 48 X 30
|
|
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Road Closed _ Miles Ahead Local Traffic Only
| R11-3
| [[#903.2.52|903.2.52]]
| 60 X 30
|
|
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Road Closed to Thru Traffic
| R11-4
| [[#903.2.52|903.2.52]]
| 60 X 30
|
|
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Weight Limit XX Tons
| R12-1
| [[#903.2.53|903.2.53]]
| 36 X 48
|
|
| 36 X 48
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Weigh Station Signs
| R13 series
| [[#903.2.54|903.2.54]]
| Varies
|
|
| Varies
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Truck Route
| R14-1
| [[#903.2.55|903.2.55]]
| 24 X 18
|
|
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  State Law Move Over or Slow Down for Stopped Emergency Vehicles
| R16-25
| [[#903.2.57|903.2.57]]
| 120 X 60
|
|
| 120 X 60
|-
|-
|'''LED Signal'''
! style="text-align:left;"| Primary Seatbelt City/Country
| R16-27B
| -
| 30 X 36
|
|
| -
|-
|-
|[http://library.modot.mo.gov/RDT/reports/RI96023/RDT99010.pdf Report 2000]
! style="text-align:left;"|  State Law Buckle Up / Phone Down
| R16-30
| [[#903.2.59|903.2.59]]
| 48 X 30
|
|
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  State Law Buckle Up / Phone Down
| R16-30a
| [[#903.2.59|903.2.59]]
| -
|
|
| 72 X 48
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Roadside Park Signs
| R20-1
| [[#903.2.66|903.2.66]]
| 30 X 30
|
|
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Rest Area Regulations
| R20-2
| [[#903.2.67|903.2.67]]
| 30 X 36
|
|
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Commuter Parking Regulations
| R20-3
| [[#903.2.67|903.2.67]]
| 42 X 48
|
|
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"|  Rest Area Signs
| R20 Series
| [[#903.2.67|903.2.67]]
|
|
|
| Varies
|}
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.4}}903.2.4  STOP Sign (R1-1) and ALL-WAY Plaque (R1-3P) (MUTCD Section 2B.04)==
 
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|-
|'''See also:''' [http://www.modot.gov/services/OR/byDate.htm Innovation Library]
|[[image:R1-1.gif|left|120px|thumb|<center>'''R1-1'''</center>]]||[[File:R1-3P.gif|left|110px|thumb|<center>'''R1-3P'''</center>]]
|}
|}
[[903.5 Regulatory Signs|Regulatory]] and [[903.6 Warning Signs|warning signs]] should be used conservatively because these signs tend to lose effectiveness if they are used to excess.  If used, route signs and directional signs should be used frequently because they promote reasonably safe and efficient operations by keeping road users informed of their location.


==903.1.1 Signing on Interstates, Freeways and Expressways with Full Access Control== 
'''Standard. '''When it is determined that a full stop is always required on an approach to an intersection, a STOP (R1-1) sign shall be used.
Complete signing (structural and sheet signs, supports, delineators, etc.) is provided by contract for these roadways and all directly affected side roads, interchanges or intersections.
 
Secondary legends shall not be used on STOP sign faces.


==903.1.2 Signing on Urban Projects==
The STOP sign shall not be displayed using a changeable message sign.
Structural ground-mounted or overhead guide signs and supports are supplied by contract.  Delineators, when specified, are furnished and installed by contract.


==903.1.3 Signing on Rural Projects==
At intersections where all approaches are controlled by STOP signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.11|EPG 903.2.11]]), an ALL-WAY (R1-3P) supplemental plaque shall be mounted below each STOP sign. The ALL-WAY plaque shall have a white legend and border on a red background.
[[image:903.1.3 rural.jpg|right|275px]]


Structural overhead and ground-mounted guide signs and sign supports are supplied by contract.  When an interchange is within the limits of a rural project, route markers, guide, regulatory and warning signs within the interchange limits are supplied by contract.  Delineators, when specified, are furnished and installed by contract.
Supplemental plaques with legends such as 2-WAY, 3-WAY, 4-WAY, or other numbers of ways shall not be used with STOP signs.


==903.1.4 Sign Function and Purpose (MUTCD Section 2A.01)==
'''Support. '''The use of the CROSS TRAFFIC DOES NOT STOP (W4-4P Series) and other plaques with variations of this legend is described in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.65|EPG 903.3.65]].
[[image:903.1.4 tourism.jpg|right|200px]]
'''Support.''' The functions of signs are to regulate, warn and guide road users.  Both words and symbols are used to convey the messages. Signs are not typically used to confirm rules of the road.  Detailed sign requirements are available for regulatory signs, warning signs, guide signs (conventional roads), guide signs (Freeways and Expressways), specific service (LOGO) signs, tourist-oriented direction signs, recreational and cultural interest area signs, emergency management signs, typical applications and sign supports.


Signing of all interstate highways is coordinated on a national basis by [http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov/pdfs/2003r1/pdf-index.htm the ''MUTCD''] and the Standard Highway Signs Manual.
'''Guidance. '''The TRAFFIC FROM LEFT (RIGHT) DOES NOT STOP (W4-4aP) plaque or ONCOMING TRAFFIC DOES NOT STOP (W4-4bP) plaque should be used at intersections where STOP signs control all but one approach to the intersection, unless the only non-stopped approach is from a one-way street.
Signing of highways other than the interstate system is coordinated on a statewide basis by MoDOT and the ''MUTCD''.


'''Standard.''' Because the requirements and standards for signs depend on the particular type of highway upon which they should be used, the following definitions shall apply:
'''Support. '''The design and application of Stop Beacons are described in [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.5|EPG 902.18.5]].


Freeway - a divided state highway in which access is provided solely through interchanges at crossroads and streets rather than at grade intersections;
=={{SpanID|903.2.5}}903.2.5 YIELD Sign (R1-2) (MUTCD Section 2B.05)==


Expressway - a divided state highway in which access may be provided through interchanges at crossroads and streets or at-grade intersections; and
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|[[image:R1-2.gif|left|120px|thumb|<center>'''R1-2'''</center>]]
||[[File:R1-2aP.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R1-2aP'''</center>|95px]]
|}


Conventional Route—a state highway that is neither a freeway nor an expressway.
'''Support. '''The YIELD sign requires road users to yield the right-of-way to other traffic on certain approaches to an intersection or on a two-way approach to a one-way section of roadway, such as a narrow bridge or underpass. Vehicles controlled by a YIELD sign need to slow down to a speed that is reasonable for the existing conditions or stop when necessary to avoid interfering with conflicting traffic.  


Any exceptions or requests for a regulatory or warning sign, or any sign for use on the Interstate system not described in this article shall be submitted to the State Traffic Engineer for consideration.
'''Standard. '''The YIELD (R1-2) sign shall not be displayed using a changeable message sign.


Special signs or special use of a sign that is not regulatory or warning, or any sign intended for use on the Interstate system shall be used at the district engineer’s discretionIf the special sign is not compliant with the MoDOT sign policy the sign shall not be funded from Central Office budget.
=={{SpanID|903.2.6}}903.2.6 General Considerations (MUTCD Section 2B.06)==


The provisions of [http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov/pdfs/2003r1/pdf-index.htm the ''MUTCD''] shall be followed for all special signs.
'''Support. '''Unsignalized intersections represent the most common form of intersection right-of-way control. Selection of control type might be impacted by specific requirements of State law or local ordinances.


'''Guidance.'''  When a special sign is approved by district discretion, consideration should be given to any statewide implication from the sign, cost to the state and the precedence the sign may set.  Advise [http://wwwi/intranet/tr/ Traffic] of any special signing approved by the districts so that this information can be shared with other districts.  This will provide a basis for other districts when considering similar requests.
Roundabouts and traffic circles are circular intersection designs and are not traffic control devices. The decision to convert an intersection from a conventional intersection to a circular intersection is an engineering design decision and not a traffic control device decision. As such, criteria for conversion from a conventional intersection to a circular intersection are not included in [[:Category:903 Highway Signing (MUTCD Part 2)|EPG 903]].  


==903.1.5 Standardization of Application (MUTCD Section 2A.03)==
'''Guidance. '''The type of traffic control used at an unsignalized intersection should be the least restrictive that provides appropriate levels of safety and efficiency for all road users.


'''Support.''' Urban traffic conditions differ from rural conditions and in many instances signs are applied and located differently.  Where pertinent and practical, this Manual sets forth separate recommendations for urban and rural conditions.
'''Support. '''Some types of right-of-way control that can exist at an unsignalized intersection in order from the least restrictive to the most restrictive are the following:


'''Guidance.'''  Signs should be used only where justified by engineering judgment or studies. Results from traffic engineering studies of physical and traffic factors should indicate the locations where signs are deemed necessary or desirable.
::A. Yield control (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.9|EPG 903.2.9]]): YIELD signs are placed on all approaches (for a circular intersection), or in the median of a divided highway. The YIELD signs are placed on the minor road.


Roadway geometric design and sign application should be coordinated so that signing can be effectively placed to give the road user any necessary regulatory, warning, guidance, and other information.
::B. Minor road stop control (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.10|EPG 903.2.10]]): STOP signs are typically placed on opposing approaches (for a four-leg intersection) or on a single approach (for a three-leg intersection). The STOP signs are normally placed on the minor road[[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.7|EPG 903.2.7]] contains guidance on selecting the minor road.
'''Standard.'''  Each standard sign shall be displayed only for the specific purpose as prescribed in this article. Determination of the particular signs to be applied to a specific condition shall be made according to the criteria set forth in this articleBefore any new highway, detour or temporary route is opened to traffic, all necessary signs shall be in place. Signs required by road conditions or restrictions shall be removed when those conditions cease to exist or the restrictions are withdrawn.


==903.1.6 Excessive Use of Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.04)==
::C. All-way stop control (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.11|EPG 903.2.11]]): STOP signs are placed on all approaches to the intersection.


'''Guidance.''' Regulatory and warning signs should be used conservatively because if these signs are used to excess their effectiveness tends to be lost. If used, route signs and directional signs should be used frequently because they promote reasonably safe and efficient operations by informing travelers of their location.  
'''Guidance. '''When selecting a form of intersection control, the following factors should be considered:
::A. Motor vehicle, bicycle, and pedestrian traffic volumes on all approaches'''; '''where the term units/day or units/hour is indicated, it should be the total of motor vehicle, bicycle, and pedestrian volume;
::B. Driver yielding behavior with regard to all modes of conflicting traffic, including bicyclists and pedestrians;
::C. Number and angle of approaches;
::D. Approach speeds;
::E. Sight distance available on each approach;
::F. Reported crash experience; and  
::G. The presence of a grade crossing near the intersection.


==903.1.7 Extent of Contract Payments (MUTCD Section 2A.04a)==
'''Standard. '''YIELD or STOP signs shall not be used for speed control.


'''Standard.'''  All structural guide signs and supports (overhead or ground mounted) are paid by contract, regardless of the type of facility. All sheet signs and supports are supplied by contract for all route classifications and project conditions.  Exceptions shall be made only by agreement among departments or divisions.
Access to the state highway system from city streets, county roads or other significant private road approaches shall be controlled by installation of MoDOT STOP signs. Significant private roads are those that service 3 or more private residences.


==903.1.8 Plan Development Procedure (MUTCD Section 2A.04b)==
'''Option. '''Stop signs, based on engineering judgment and a traffic study justifying the need, may be installed for a private road approach servicing fewer than 3 private residences, or a commercial entrance.
[[image:903.1.8 District Maintenance.jpg|right|300px|thumb|
<center>'''District Maintenance'''</center>]]
'''Standard.''' The preparation of signing plans requires the cooperation and coordination between district Maintenance, Traffic and Design.


When using preexisting structures to accommodate larger new signs, consideration shall be given to the dimensions and load capacity of the existing structure. The larger signs must properly fit on the existing structure and not exceed the structure’s design capacity.
'''Standard. '''Because the potential for conflicting commands could create driver confusion, YIELD or STOP signs shall not be used in conjunction with any traffic control signal operation, except in the following cases:
::A. If the signal indication for an approach is a flashing red at all times;
::B. If a minor street or driveway is located within or adjacent to the area controlled by the traffic control signal, but does not require separate traffic signal control because an extremely low potential for conflict exists; or
::C. If a channelized turn lane is separated from the adjacent travel lanes by an island and the channelized turn lane is not controlled by a traffic control signal.  


When the need arises to modify the legend of a sign not built to current standards, the entire sign shall be replaced.
STOP signs and YIELD signs shall not be installed on different approaches to the same unsignalized intersection if those approaches conflict with or oppose each other, except as provided for in Items A and B in the first paragraph of [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.9|EPG 903.2.9]].  


'''Guidance.'''  [http://wwwi/intranet/br/default.htm Bridge] is to be consulted for mounting signs directly on bridges and other structures, special truss designs and bridge- or wall-mounted trusses.
Portable or part-time STOP or YIELD signs shall not be used except for emergency and temporary traffic control zone purposes.  


Sign visibility from a distance is critical.  Sign locations should be coordinated with other design features that include, but are not limited to bridges, highway lighting, traffic signals, drainage structures, overhead utilities, underground utilities and horizontal and vertical alignments that decrease sign visibility.
A portable or part-time (folding) STOP sign that is manually placed into view and manually removed from view shall not be used during a power outage to control a signalized approach unless the maintaining agency establishes that the signal indication that will first be displayed to that approach upon restoration of power is a flashing red signal indication and that the portable STOP sign will be manually removed from view prior to resuming stop-and-go operation of the traffic control signal.  


The district should prepare proposed sign locations and review the plans for standards and quality control.
'''Option. '''When a STOP sign or YIELD sign is knocked down and it is not possible to repair the assembly immediately, a temporary sign of the same likeness (STOP sign for STOP and YIELD sign for YIELD) may be installed on a portable sign support at the location until the permanent assembly can be repaired. See [[:Category:948 Incident Response Plan and Emergency Response Management|EPG 948]] for additional information regarding Incident Response Planning.


When the sign is mounted on a truss, all signs on the truss not built to current standards should be replaced after considering the age, future conditions and detail of the sign.
'''Support. '''The use of STOP signs at grade crossings is described in [[913.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 8B) #913.2.4|EPG 913.2.4]] and [[913.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 8B) #913.2.5|EPG 913.2.5]].


It is recommended that all signs, which do not follow standard designs, be identified. Non-standard signs should be justified.
[[914.2 Regulatory Signs (MUTCD Chapter 9B) #914.2.1|EPG 914.2.1]] contains provisions regarding the assignment of priority where a shared-use path crosses a roadway.


For preliminary discussions, only the sign location plan showing existing and proposed signing is recommended.  Sign details, cross-sections, tabulation sheets, computer generated sign designs or other detailed information should not be completed at this time. Once the preliminary location plan is agreed on, the district is to prepare [[media:D-31.doc|special sign detail sheets (D-31)]], [[media:D-29.pdf|forms D-29]] and [[media:D-30.pdf|D-30]] (see Figure 903.1.12.1), truss data sheets and template cross-sections for trusses and ground mounted signsTruss cross-sections should not be drawn on the same sheets as ground mounted sign cross-sections. The districts are responsible for accuracy of the preliminary and final detail design.  
=={{SpanID|903.2.7}}903.2.7 Determining the Minor Road for Unsignalized Intersections (MUTCD Section 2B.07)==


The district finalizes the plans and is to submit them to Design with the roadway plans, or as a separate project if so programmed. The districts are responsible for accuracy and completeness of plans. Typical signing location plans for interchanges are shown in [[903.13 Typical Signing Applications|EPG 903.13 Typical Signing Applications]].  Design Division is available for consultation during any part of the plan preparation process.
'''Guidance. '''The selection of the minor road to be controlled by STOP signs should be based on one or more of the following criteria:
::A. A roadway intersecting a highway,
::B. A roadway with the lower functional classification,
::C. A roadway with the lower traffic volume,
::D. A roadway with the lower speed limit, and/or
::E. A roadway that intersects with a roadway that has a higher priority for one or more modes of travel.


A [[media:D-28.doc|Sign Design Order Form (Design Form D-28)]] should be completed for all and sent to Traffic as soon as the signs are identified.
When two roadways that have relatively equal volumes, speeds, and/or other characteristics intersect, the following factors should be considered in selecting the minor road for installation of STOP signs:
::A. Controlling the direction that conflicts the most with established pedestrian crossing activity or school walking routes;
::B. Controlling the direction that has obscured vision, dips, or bumps that already require drivers to use lower operating speeds;
::C. Controlling the direction that has the best sight distance from a controlled position to observe conflicting traffic; and
::D. Stopping the direction that has the longest distance of uninterrupted flow approaching the intersection.


Preliminary layouts of special signs should be submitted along with the completed D-28 form to Traffic so the final design can be produced using SignCAD. This program incorporates MoDOT standards and generates an output sheet that can be inserted into the plansAll special signs should be designed according to the dimensional data shown in the ''Standard Highway Signs'' manual, standard plans, ''MUTCD'', standard specifications and this article.  Traffic should review all signs.
=={{SpanID|903.2.8}}903.2.8 Right-of-Way Intersection Control Considerations (MUTCD Section 2B.08)==


The legend of a sign with L-2 (demountable) or L-4 (button) copy should not be modified. These signs should be replaced. Any signs originally fabricated with a baked enamel background (STB type) should be replaced.
'''Guidance. '''Before converting to a more restrictive form of right-of-way control at an unsignalized intersection, the following alternative treatments to address safety, operational, or other concerns should be among those to be considered:
::A. Where stop controlled, installing Stop Ahead signs on the appropriate approaches to the intersection;
::B. Removing parking on one or more approaches;
::C. Removing sight distance obstructions;
::D. Installing signs along the major street to warn road users approaching the intersection;
::E. Relocating the stop line(s) and making other changes to improve the sight distance at the intersection;
::F. Installing measures designed to reduce speeds on the approaches;
::G. Installing an Intersection Control Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.2|EPG 902.18.2]]) or Stop Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.5|EPG 902.18.5]]) at the intersection to supplement STOP sign control;
::H. Installing a Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3)]] on warning signs in advance of a stop-controlled intersection on major-street and/or minor-street approaches;
::I. Adding one or more lanes on a minor-street approach to reduce the number of vehicles per lane on the approach;
::J. Revising the geometrics at the intersection to channelize vehicular movements and reduce the time required for a vehicle to complete a movement, which could also assist pedestrians;
::K. Revising the geometrics at the intersection to add pedestrian median refuge islands and/or curb extensions;
::L. Installing roadway lighting if a disproportionate number of crashes occur at night;
::M. Restricting one or more turning movements on a full-time or part-time basis if alternate routes are available;
::N. Installing on the major street a pedestrian-actuated device: Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]), rectangular rapid-flashing beacon (see [[902.12 Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4L) #902.12.1|EPG 902.12.1]]), or In-Roadway Warning Lights (see [[902.20 In-Roadway Warning Lights (MUTCD Chapter 4U) #902.20|EPG 902.20]]), if pedestrian safety is the major concern;
::O. If the warrant is satisfied, installing all-way stop control;
::P. Installing a pedestrian hybrid beacon (see [[902.10 Pedestrian Hybrid Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4J) #902.10|EPG 902.10]]) on the major street to address pedestrian safety;
::Q. Installing a circular intersection; and
::R. Employing other alternatives, depending on conditions at the intersection.


If an existing truss with luminaires is provided with new signs, consideration is to be given to shutting off the power and removing the luminaires due to the high reflectivity of structural sign sheeting.
=={{SpanID|903.2.9}}903.2.9 Yield Control (MUTCD Section 2B.10)==


'''Option.''' Design or Traffic may provide comments on the preliminary layout at the district's request. It is suggested that districts form review teams from various departments to review plans at the preliminary layout stage, and at final design. After the district reviews plans, Design Division may be consulted for review at the district's discretion.
'''Guidance. '''YIELD signs should be installed at an intersection when any of the following conditions apply:
::A. At the second intersection of a divided highway crossing or median break functioning as two separate intersections (see [[#fig903.2.41.2|Figure 903.2.41.2]]). In this case, a YIELD sign should be installed at the entrance to the second intersection.
::B. For a channelized turn lane that is separated from the adjacent travel lanes by an island, even if the adjacent lanes at the intersection are controlled by a highway traffic control signal or by a STOP sign.  
::C. At an intersection where a special problem exists and where engineering judgment indicates the problem to be susceptible to correction by the use of the YIELD sign.
::D. On an approach to an intersection where the only permissible movement is a right-turn movement with an intersection geometry similar to a channelized right-turn lane or an approach to a roundabout.  


Larger plan scales, like 1 in. = 50 ft. (1:500), may be used if necessary to show complex interchanges or intersections with numerous signs.
'''Support. '''YIELD signs are generally not to be installed at entrance ramps on MoDOT freeways or expressways where an acceleration lane is provided. The intention is for drivers to accelerate to improve merging traffic operation. YIELD signs may cause drivers to decelerate, thus negatively impacting merging traffic operation. For cloverleaf interchanges, the loop entrance ramps can result in low speeds on ramps and short weave sections. Therefore, YIELD signs are installed at cloverleaf interchanges.  


Two or more segments of alignment may be shown on one sheet.  For ease of design, review and construction, sign locations for interchanges are completely shown on one sheet.
'''Standard. '''YIELD signs shall be used at a cloverleaf interchange where the in-loop traffic merges with the acceleration and deceleration traffic movement.  


'''Support.''' Location plans show the proposed pavement geometrics, the sign location, sign number, station, width and height, sign code (if applicable) and special or standard legend on standard 22 in. x 34 in. sheets drawn to a scale of 1 in. = 100 ft. (1:1000) or 1 in. = 200 ft. (1:2000). Sign sizes are shown as width x height, in feet and/or inches for sheet signs, and in feet only for structural signs. Tabulated removals and general information is show for existing signs. The standard sign code (i.e. R3-1a, W10-1, etc.) is shown for signs found in the ''Standard Highway Signs'' manual or standard plans.
'''Option. '''YIELD signs may be installed facing the entering roadway for a merge-type movement if engineering judgment indicates that control is needed because acceleration geometry and/or sight distance is not adequate for merging traffic operation. The design criteria contained in Section 10.9.6.5 of the “AASHTO Green Book – A Policy on Geometric Design Of Highways and Streets,” 7th Edition, 2018, AASHTO should be used to evaluate acceleration lane geometry. (See [[903.15 Typical Signing Applications #fig903.16.23|Figure 903.15.23]]).


Signs are numbered in a logical order. Existing signs, which should be removed or remain in place, are not numbered.  Multiple signs on a single mount are further indicated with lower case letters (i.e. 45(a), 45(b), 45(c)).  If signs are added or deleted at a later date, renumbering all signs is not required.  If signs are added, signs may be numbered 43, 43A, 43B, etc., or the next highest sign number may be used.  If signs are deleted, a general note listing voided signs is provided.
'''Standard. '''A YIELD sign shall be used to require road users to yield the right-of-way to other traffic at the entrance to a roundabout. YIELD signs at roundabouts shall be used to control the approach roadways and shall not be used to control the circulatory roadway.  


Existing signs are shown with dashed lines and are listed as a removal item where appropriate.  Existing signs to be relocated to new posts and new signs on existing posts are numbered and noted as such.  Existing signs in poor condition should be replaced.  In complex areas where many signs should be replaced, proposed signing and existing signing may be shown separately on different plan sheets to avoid clutter and plan confusion; however, combined is preferred, if possible.
YIELD signs shall not be placed on all of the approaches to an intersection, except at roundabouts.


When replacing signs for many miles of roadway to be let in sections, it is desirable to generate an overall sign location plan to coordinate guide sign placement through numerous projects. For this situation it is not necessary to show signs other than guide signs. It is recommended to show the limits of each project on this location planSigns are identified as truss, bridge- or ground-mounted or as strapped to a signal post or column. If applicable, truss type (cantilever, span, butterfly) and location are shown. Whether the truss is box or tubular does not need to be noted on preliminary location plan, but is shown on the final plan. A standard legend identifying symbols is used to alleviate crowding on plans.  Typical location plans at interchanges are shown in [[903.13 Typical Signing Applications|EPG 903.13 Typical Signing Applications]]. 
=={{SpanID|903.2.10}}903.2.10 Minor Road Stop Control (MUTCD Section 2B.11)==


Truss pedestals are not placed in gore areas or other areas that have high exposure to traffic.
'''Standard.''' All city street and county road access to the state highway system shall be controlled by a stop sign except as described in [[#903.2.9|EPG 903.2.9]] and [[:Category:902 Signals|EPG 902]].


A number of standard signs are detailed in ''Standard Highway Signs'' and in the standard plansSpecial sign detail sheets are not required for signs detailed in these references.
=={{SpanID|903.2.11}}903.2.11 All-Way Stop Control (MUTCD Section 2B.12)==


When staged projects are scheduled in unison or closely together, complete signs are provided with the inappropriate legend covered until needed.  Legends to be covered are noted on the plans, and the resident engineer is to approve the covering method. No direct pay is made for covering legends. When structural signs should be erected with only part of the legend in place at the initial time of construction, the sign and legend are shown on the plans with solid lines, and the legend to be placed at a later date is shown with dashed lines. A note is included indicating the dashed legend will be provided by future construction.  The omitted legend is included in the roadway contract, which completes the sign.
'''Support. '''The provisions in the following sections describe warrants for the recommended engineering study to determine all-way stop control. Warrants are not a substitute for engineering judgment. The fact that a warrant for a particular traffic control device is met is not conclusive justification to install or not install all-way stop control. Because each intersection will have unique characteristics that affect its operational performance or safety, it is the engineering study for a given intersection that is ultimately the basis for a decision to install or not install all-way stop control.


When the legend of an existing sign built to current standards is modified, the existing sign and legend are shown with dashed lines and the legend to be added is shown with solid lines.  Sufficient information is provided to show series, type, size and spacing of new legend on the sign detail sheet.  New legend types ([[903.4 Guide Signs#903.4.1.5 Legend Types|L-1 or L-3]]) should match the existing legend type.  The work is paid for as "Modified Legend", lump sum and a special provision and special pay item are included.  
All-way stop controls at intersections with substantially differing approach volumes can reduce the effectiveness of these devices for all roadway users.


The district prepares tabulation sheets on [[media:D-29.pdf|Forms D-29 (Sign Posts, Footings, Delineators and Mileposts)]] and [[media:D-30.pdf|D-30 (Signs)]], and [[media:D-32.doc|Data Sheets D-32]], [[media:D-33.doc|D-33]] and [[media:D-34.doc|D-34]]. These forms are available as MicroStation seed files and examples are shown on Figure 903.1.12.1.
'''Guidance. '''The decision to establish all-way stop control at an unsignalized intersection should be based on an engineering study. The engineering study for all-way stop control should include an analysis of factors related to the existing operation and safety at the intersection, the potential to improve these conditions, and the applicable factors contained in the following all-way stop control warrants:
::A. All-Way Stop Control Warrant A: Crash Experience (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.12|EPG 903.2.12]])
::B. All-Way Stop Control Warrant B: Sight Distance (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.13|EPG 903.2.13]])
::C. All-Way Stop Control Warrant C: Transition to Signal Control or Transition to Yield Control at a Circular Intersection (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.14|EPG 903.2.14]])
::D. All-Way Stop Control Warrant D: 8-Hour Volume (Vehicles, Pedestrians, Bicycles) (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.15|EPG 903.2.15]])
::E. All-Way Stop Control Warrant E: Other Factors (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.16|EPG 903.2.16]])


On Form D-29, all signs are listed in order according to sign number.  This form includes truss footing and pedestal concrete quantities.
'''Standard. '''The satisfaction of an all-way stop control warrant or warrants shall not in itself require the installation of all-way stop control at an unsignalized intersection.


On Form D-30, all standard signs are totaled on the left hand side of the sheetThe right hand side is used to list special signs and provides an overall summary of all sign types.
=={{SpanID|903.2.12}}903.2.12 All-Way Stop Control Warrant A: Crash Experience (MUTCD Section 2B.13)==


Truss data sheet forms are completed for all trusses. Form D-32 is used for cantilever and butterfly box trusses. Form D-33 is used for span and span-cantilever box trusses. Form D-34 is the truss data sheet used for all tubular sign supports. (Refer to Figure 903.1.12.1.)
'''Option. '''All-way stop control may be installed at an intersection where an engineering study indicates that:
::A. For a four-leg intersection, there are five or more reported crashes in a 12-month period or six or more reported crashes in a 36-month period that were of a type susceptible to correction by the installation of all-way stop control.  
::B. For a three-leg intersection, there are four or more reported crashes in a 12-month period or five or more reported crashes in a 36-month period that were of a type susceptible to correction by the installation of all-way stop control.


Guide sign standards in this section and the standard plans are used whenever possible. Conditions that require deviation for these standards are held to a minimum and justified. Design variances require district justification at the preliminary sign location stage. Signing variances are also noted in the plansSome deviations from design standards may require approval.
=={{SpanID|903.2.13}}903.2.13 All-Way Stop Control Warrant B: Sight Distance (MUTCD Section 2B.14)==


==903.1.9 Signing Plans (MUTCD Section 2A.04c)==
'''Option. '''All-way stop control may be installed at an intersection where an engineering study indicates that sight distance on the minor-road approaches controlled by a STOP sign is not adequate for a vehicle to turn onto or cross the major (uncontrolled) road.


'''Standard.''' When signing is a separate project, the plans are assembled in the following order:
'''Support. '''At such a location, a road user, after stopping, cannot see conflicting traffic and is not able to negotiate the intersection unless conflicting cross traffic is also required to stop.


1. title sheet
=={{SpanID|903.2.14}}903.2.14  All-Way Stop Control Warrant C: Transition to Signal Control or Transition to Yield Control at a Circular Intersection (MUTCD Section 2B.15)==


2. 2A sheet
'''Option. '''All-way stop control may be installed at locations where all-way stop control is an interim measure that can be installed to control traffic while arrangements are being made for the installation of a traffic control signal (see [[902.3 Traffic Control Signal Needs Studies (MUTCD Chapter 4C) #902.3|EPG 902.3]]) at the intersection or for the installation of yield control at a circular intersection.


3. 2B sheets for roadway items
=={{SpanID|903.2.15}}903.2.15  All-Way Stop Control Warrant D: 8-Hour Volume (Vehicles, Pedestrians, Bicycles) (MUTCD Section 2B.16)==


4. sign location plan sheets
'''Option. '''All-way stop control may be installed at an intersection where an engineering study indicates:
::A. The combined motor vehicle, bicycle, and pedestrian volume entering the intersection from the major-street approaches is at least 300 units per hour for each of any 8 hours of a typical day; and
::B. The combined motor vehicle, bicycle, and pedestrian volume entering the intersection from the minor-street approaches is at least 200 units per hour for each of any of the same 8 hours.


5. special sheets
If the 85th-percentile approach speed of the major-street traffic exceeds 40 mph, the minimum vehicular volume warrants may be reduced to 70 percent of the values given in Items A and B in the preceding paragraph.  


6. traffic control plans
=={{SpanID|903.2.16}}903.2.16  All-Way Stop Control Warrant E: Other Factors (MUTCD Section 2B.17)==


7. erosion control plan
'''Option. '''All-way stop control may be installed at an intersection where an engineering study indicates that all-way stop control is needed due to other factors not addressed in the other all-way stop control warrants. Such other factors may include, but are not limited to, the following:
::A. The need to control left-turn conflicts,
::B. An intersection of two residential neighborhood collector (through) streets of similar design and operating characteristics where all-way stop control would improve traffic operational characteristics of the intersection, or
::C. Where pedestrian and/or bicyclist movements support the installation of all-way stop control.


8. tabulation sheet [[media:D-29.pdf|(D-29)]]
=={{SpanID|903.2.17}}903.2.17  STOP Sign or YIELD Sign Placement (MUTCD Section 2B.18)==


9. tabulation sheet [[media:D-30.pdf|(D-30)]]
'''Standard. '''The STOP or YIELD sign shall be installed on the near side of the intersection on the right-hand side of the approach to which it applies. When the STOP or YIELD sign is installed at this required location and the sign visibility is restricted, a Stop Ahead sign (see  [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.29|EPG 903.2.29]]) shall be installed in advance of the STOP sign or a Yield Ahead sign (see  [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.29|EPG 903.2.29]]) shall be installed in advance of the YIELD sign.


10. special sign detail sheets [[media:D-31.doc|(D-31)]]
The STOP or YIELD sign shall be located as close as practicable to the intersection it regulates, while optimizing its visibility to the road user it is intended to regulate.


11. design data sheets for cantilever and butterfly box trusses [[media:D-32.doc|(D-32)]]
STOP signs and YIELD signs shall not be mounted on the same post.


12. design data sheets for overhead span box trusses [[media:D-33.doc|(D-33)]]  
'''Support. ''' [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.5|EPG 903.1.5]] contains information about mounting signs back-to-back with a STOP or YIELD sign.


13. design data sheet for tubular trusses [[media:D-34.doc|(D-34)]]
'''Guidance. '''STOP or YIELD signs should not be placed farther than 50 feet from the edge of the pavement of the intersected roadway (see Drawing F in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #fig903-1-13-1|Figure 903.1.13]]).


14. truss cross section sheets
Supplemental plaques used in conjunction with a STOP or YIELD sign should be limited to those specified for such use in the EPG.


15. cross sections for ground mounted signs
'''Standard. '''Where drivers proceeding straight ahead must yield to traffic approaching from the opposite direction, such as at a one-lane bridge, a TO ONCOMING TRAFFIC (R1-2aP) plaque shall be mounted below the YIELD sign. See [[#fig903.2.53.2|Figure 903.2.53.2]] and [[#fig903.2.53.3|Figure 903.2.53.3]] in [[#903.2.53|EPG 903.2.53]].


16. special sheets for bridge mounted signing
'''Support. '''[[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.13|Figure 903.1.13]] shows examples of some typical placements of STOP signs and YIELD signs.


Typically, signing is included with the roadway plans. When this is the case, the plans are assembled together, including the quantity sheets. Separate 2B sheets shall not be generated for signing quantities. The signing plans shall be arranged in the following order:
[[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.13|EPG 903.1.13]] contains additional information about separate and combined mounting of other signs with STOP or YIELD signs.


1. sign location plan sheet
'''Guidance. '''Stop lines that are used to supplement a STOP sign should be located as described in [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.18|EPG 620.2.18]]. Yield lines that are used to supplement a YIELD sign should be located as described in [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.18|EPG 620.2.18]].


2. tabulation sheet (D-29)
Where there is a marked crosswalk at the intersection, the STOP sign should be installed in advance of the edge of the crosswalk that is nearest to the approaching traffic.


3. tabulation sheet (D-30)
Except at roundabouts and channelized right-turn lanes, where there is a marked crosswalk at the intersection, the YIELD sign should be installed in advance of the edge of the crosswalk that is nearest to the approaching traffic.


4. special sign detail sheets (D-31)
Where two roads intersect at an acute angle, the STOP or YIELD sign should be positioned at an angle, or shielded, so that the legend is out of view of traffic to which it does not apply.


5. design data sheets for cantilever and butterfly box trusses (D-32)
At a roundabout intersection, to prevent circulating vehicles from yielding unnecessarily, the face of the YIELD sign is not to be visible from the circulatory roadway.


6. design data sheets for overhead span box trusses (D-33)
If a raised splitter island is available on the left-hand side of a multi-lane roundabout approach, an additional YIELD sign should be placed on the left-hand side of the approach.


7. design data sheet for tubular trusses (D-34)
'''Option. '''If a raised splitter island is available on the left-hand side of a single-lane roundabout approach, an additional YIELD sign may be placed on the left-hand side of the approach.


8. truss cross section sheets
At wide-throat intersections or where two or more approach lanes of traffic exist on the signed approach, an additional STOP or YIELD sign may be installed on the left-hand side of the road and/or a stop or yield line may be used to improve observance of the right-of-way control. At channelized intersections or at divided roadways separated by a median or divisional island (painted or physical), the additional STOP or YIELD sign may be placed on a channelizing island, or in the median or on the divisional island.  


9. cross sections for ground mounted signs
'''Standard. '''More than one STOP sign or more than one YIELD sign shall not be placed on the same support facing in the same direction.


10. special sheets for bridge mounted signs
=={{SpanID|903.2.18}}903.2.18  Yield Here To Pedestrians Signs (R1-5 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.19)==


11. any miscellaneous special signing detail sheets.
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
||[[image:R1-5.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R1-5'''</center>|130px]]||
[[image:R1-5d.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R1-5d'''</center>|120px]]
|}


==903.1.10 Quantity Computations (MUTCD Section 2A.04d)==
'''Support. '''The R1-5 series signs are intended to mitigate the scenario that can place pedestrians at risk by blocking other drivers’ view of pedestrians and by blocking the pedestrians' view of the vehicles approaching in the adjacent lanes.


'''Standard.''' Signs shall be totaled on [http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/standards_and_specs/MicroStationV8.htm Form D-30] (refer to Figure 903.1.12.1).  Structural signs’ width and height are designed to the nearest foot. Each standard or special sign shall be calculated to the nearest 0.1 sq. ft., subtotaled to the nearest 0.1 sq. ft., and final pay total should the nearest sq. ft.
'''Standard. '''Yield Here to Pedestrians (R1-5, R1-5a, R1-5c, and R1-5d) signs shall be used if yield lines are used in advance of a marked crosswalk only where it crosses an uncontrolled multi-lane approach. The legend STATE LAW shall not be displayed on the R1-5 series signs.  


All post quantities shall be calculated and totaled on [http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/standards_and_specs/MicroStationV8.htm Form D-29] (refer to Figure 903.1.12.1).  All post lengths shall be calculated in increments of 0.25 ft. including the length that extends into the concrete footing or ground as shown on the standard plans.  All U-channel post lengths shall include the full length of both pieces when overlaps are required.  The post length for wide flange and pipe posts shall be multiplied by the lb/ft factor, as shown in the standard plans; each sign's posts are subtotaled to the nearest pound; all sign posts are subtotaled; and the final pay totals are shown to the nearest 10 pounds. All U-channel, wood and perforated square steel tube post length quantities shall be totaled and rounded to the nearest foot. For perforated square steel tube posts, an additional pay item shall be included for the anchor sleeve which is paid for by the linear foot for each post used (and may also include a soil plate).
'''Guidance. '''If yield lines and Yield Here to Pedestrians signs are used in advance of a crosswalk that crosses an uncontrolled multi-lane approach, the signs should be placed 20 to 50 feet in advance of the nearest edge of the crosswalk (see  [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.18|EPG 620.2.18]] and [[#fig620.2.18|Figure 620.2.18]]).


Concrete for signs and trusses shall be totaled on Form D-29 (see Figure 903.1.12.1).  Concrete for truss footings and pedestals shall be bolted down.  Concrete for all ground-mounted sign footings shall be embedded.  Bolted down and embedded quantities shall be calculated for each sign to the nearest 0.01 cubic yard, subtotaled to the nearest 0.01 cubic yard and a final pay total is shown to the nearest 0.1 cubic yard.
'''Standard. '''When used with a School Crossing assembly within school zones (see [[:Category:908 Traffic Controls for School Areas (MUTCD Part 7)|EPG 908]]), the R1-5a sign shall be used in place of the R1-5 sign in accordance with the second paragraph of this article.


Cantilever and butterfly tubular support trusses shall have standard pay items.  Span tubular trusses shall require special pay items.  Information in the description shall include span length, truss number and span design type.  Truss pay items shall include costs for all labor and materials associated with the truss, from the bottom of the base plate up, as a lump sum item. Each span truss shall have a separate pay item.  Truss data shall be provided on [[media:D-34.doc|Form D-34]].  (See Figure 903.1.12.1.)
When used with a Trail Crossing assembly (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.44|EPG 903.3.44]]), the R1-5d sign shall be used in place of the R1-5 sign in accordance with the second paragraph of this article.


All box trusses shall require a special pay item for each truss.  All pay item descriptions shall include span length and truss number.  Truss pay items shall include costs for all labor and materials associated with the truss, from the bottom of the base plate up, as a lump sum item.  Each box truss, regardless of type, shall have a separate pay item.
'''Guidance. '''When Yield Here to Pedestrians signs are provided in advance of a crosswalk across an multi-lane approach, parking should be prohibited in the area between the yield line and the crosswalk.


See [http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/standards_and_specs/documents/90303.pdf Standard Plan 903.03] for payment of delineators, emergency reference markers and Type IV Object Markers.  These items shall be paid for per each on Form D-29, and include installation, bolts, post and sign.
Yield lines and Yield Here to Pedestrians signs should not be used in advance of crosswalks that cross an approach to or departure from a roundabout.  


Breakaway assemblies shall be totaled on Form D-29 (refer to Figure 903.1.12.1).  All assemblies shall be paid for with the same [http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/contractor_resources/biditemslisting.htm bid item].
'''Option. '''A Pedestrian Crossing (W11-2) warning sign may be placed overhead or may be post-mounted with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque at the crosswalk location where Yield Here to Pedestrians signs have been installed in advance of the crosswalk.


Backing bar lengths and weights shall be shown on Form D-29 (see Figure 903.1.12.1.), and are totaled with the pay item for structural steel posts.  No weight deductions shall be made for punched or drilled holes.  If no structural steel posts are used on a project, backing bar weights shall be added to pipe post weights.
'''Standard. '''If a W11-2 sign is post-mounted at the crosswalk location where a Yield Here to Pedestrians sign is used on the approach, the Yield Here to Pedestrians sign shall not be placed on the same post as the W11-2 sign.  


Special pay items shall not be included for items considered to be small amounts of work such as the following: strapping signs to lighting or signal posts or truss columns; covering inappropriate legends; "EXIT ONLY" panels on new signs; any symbol, arrow, shield or legend on new guide signs; hinge plates; aluminum wide flange posts for connecting service signs and exit number panels to structural guide signs; etc.  No additional payment shall be made for hardware.  Other than the above, it shall be left to the designer to decide which items require direct pay.
'''Option. '''An advance Pedestrian Crossing (W11-2) warning sign with an AHEAD or a distance supplemental plaque may be used in conjunction with a Yield Here to Pedestrians sign on the approach to the same crosswalk.


'''Guidance.'''  Special pay items for signing may be required.  Some examples of special work include: modifying legends, relocating existing signs to new posts, temporary ground mounting guide signs, bridge mounted support brackets, truss painting, pedestal repair, etc.  It is left to the designer to decide which items require special pay items.
In-Street Pedestrian Crossing signs and Yield Here to Pedestrians signs may be used together at the same crosswalk.


'''Support.'''  Most jobs include the removal of existing signs and/or trusses. All removals are listed with other roadway Removal of Improvements.  It is preferred to list the type of truss to be removed, number of pedestals, posts, footings and a rough estimate of sign area. Consult a traffic engineer or District Construction and Materials engineer about which removals to salvage and where the contractor should deliver the salvaged materialsItems to be salvaged and delivery of these items are mentioned in the job special provisions and this work is paid for under Removal of Improvements.
=={{SpanID|903.2.19}}903.2.19 In-Street Pedestrian and Trail Crossing Signs (R1-6 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.20)==


==903.1.11 Sign Classification (MUTCD Section 2A.05)==
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" align=right
|-
|-
|colspan="2" align="center"|'''Major sporting events are traffic generators'''
||[[File:R1-6.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R1-6'''</center>|130px]]||
[[File:R1-6d.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R1-6d'''</center>|130px]]
|-
|-
|[[image:903.1.11 traffic generators.jpg|350px]]||[[image:903.1.11.1.jpg|178px]]
| colspan="2" style="padding: 4px 8px;border: 1px solid #c8ccd1;background-color: #f8f9fa;;"|'''Note: '''The legend STATE LAW is optional
|}
|}
'''Standard.'''  Signs shall be defined by their function as follows:


A. Regulatory signs give notice of traffic laws or regulations.
'''Option. '''The In-Street Pedestrian Crossing (R1-6) sign, In-Street Trail Crossing (R1-6d) sign, may be used to remind road users of laws regarding right-of-way at an unsignalized crosswalk. The legend STATE LAW may be displayed at the top of the R1-6 series signs if applicable. On the R1-6 series signs, the legend YIELD may be used instead of the appropriate YIELD sign symbol.
 
MoDOT may develop and apply criteria for determining the applicability of In-Street Pedestrian Crossing signs.


B. Warning signs give notice of a situation that might not be readily apparent.
'''Standard. '''If used, In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing signs shall only be placed in the roadway at the crosswalk location on a raised island.


C. Guide signs show route designations, destinations, directions, distances, services, points of interest and other geographical, recreational, or cultural information. The amount of signing a site can receive along a given path is defined by sign order and is intended to provide signing from the site out to the closest major route.  Any site may receive up to third order signing or the signing can extend to the closest interchange, whichever is encountered first.  If a site is located between two major routes, the siging may extend up to third order or the closest interchange towards both major routes.
The In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing sign shall not be post-mounted on the left-hand or right-hand side of the roadway.  


The order classification of signs (sign order) shall be defined as follows:
'''Support. ''' [[620.8 Channelizing Devices used for Emphasis of Pavement Marking Patterns (MUTCD Chapter 3I) #620.8.2|EPG 620.8.2]] contains information about the use of tubular markers to provide additional emphasis for a pedestrian crossing. '''


'''1. First Order Signing.''' Signs that are installed in advance of the closest intersection or interchange where motorists turn off of the state highway system to arrive at the desired traffic generator or site. First order signing will always be on state right of way.  
'''Standard. '''When used at an uncontrolled crossing, the In-Street Pedestrian Crossing sign shall be used only as a supplement to a Pedestrian Crossing (W11-2) warning sign with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque at the crosswalk location.  


'''2. Second Order Signing.''' Signs that are installed in advance of the intersection or interchange where motorists turn to access the highway where the first order signing is provided. Second order signing will always be on state right of way and shall
When used at an uncontrolled crossing, the In-Street Trail Crossing sign shall be used only as a supplement to a Trail Crossing (W11-15) warning sign with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque at the crosswalk location.
require the use of first order signing on state right of way.  


'''3. Third Order Signing.'''  Signs that are installed in advance of the intersection or interchange where motorists turn to access the highway where the second order signing is provided. Third order signing will always be on state right of way and shall require the use of first order and second order signing on state right of way.
An In-Street or Trail Crossing sign shall not be placed in advance of the crosswalk to educate road users about the State law prior to reaching the crosswalk, nor shall it be installed as an educational display that is not near any crosswalk.
[[image:Figure 903.1.12.2.gif|center|frame|thumb|'''Figure 903.1.11  Sign Order Classification''']]
'''Support.'''  In general, as the “order” of signing increases, the functional classification of road stays the same or increases.  For example, if first order signing is on a four-lane U.S. route, second order signing should be on another U.S. route, expressway or a freeway.  In this example case, second order signing should not be placed on a two-lane Route “ZZ.


==903.1.12 Sign Design (MUTCD Section 2A.06)==
'''Option. '''In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing signs may be mounted back-to-back on a raised island in the median of an undivided roadway.  


'''Support.''' This article shows many typical standard signs approved for use on streets, highways, bikeways and pedestrian crossings.
'''Standard. '''The In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing sign shall not be used at crosswalks on approaches controlled by a traffic control signal, pedestrian hybrid beacon, or an emergency-vehicle hybrid beacon.  


In the specifications for individual signs, the general appearance of the legend, color and size are shown in the accompanying tables and illustrations, and are not always detailed in the text.
'''Option. '''The In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing sign may be used at intersections or midblock pedestrian crossings with flashing beacons.  


Detailed drawings of standard signs and alphabets are shown in MoDOT Standard Plans and the federal ''Standard Highway Signs''.
'''Support. '''The provisions of [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.15|EPG 903.1.15]] concerning mounting height are not applicable for the In-Street Pedestrian Crossing sign.  [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.18|EPG 903.1.18]] contains information about sign mounting methods.


Figure 903.1.12:
'''Standard. '''The top of an In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing sign placed in an island shall be a maximum of 4 feet above the island surface.
[[media:D-29.pdf|(D-29)]]
[[media:D-30.pdf|(D-30)]]


A highway sign must be legible to those for whom it is intended and be understandable from a distance to permit a proper response. It is desirable for it to be highly visible by day and night and highly legible (i.e., adequately sized letters or symbols and a short legend for quick comprehension by an approaching traveler).  Standardized colors and shapes are specified so that the several classes of traffic signs can be promptly recognized.  Simplicity and uniformity in design, position, and application are important.
'''Option. '''The In-Street Pedestrian Crossing or Trail Crossing signs may be used seasonally to prevent damage in winter because of plowing operations, and may be removed at night if the pedestrian activity at night is minimal.


'''Standard.'''  The term legend shall include all word messages and symbol designs that are intended to convey specific meaningsUniformity in design includes shape, color, dimensions, legends, borders and illumination or retro-reflectivity.
=={{SpanID|903.2.20}}903.2.20 Speed Limit Sign (R2-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.21)==


Where a standard word message is applicable, the wording shall be as herein provided.  Standardization of these designs does not preclude further improvement by minor changes in the proportion or orientation of symbols, width of borders, or layout of word messages, but all shapes and colors shall be as indicated.
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|[[image:R2-1.png|left|thumb|150px|<center>'''R2-1'''</center>]]
|}


In situations where word messages are required other than those herein provided, the signs shall be of the same shape and color as standard signs of the same functional type.
'''Support. '''In general, the maximum speed limits applicable to roads are established:
::A. Statutorily – a maximum speed limit applicable to a particular class of road, such as freeways or city streets, that is established by State law; or
::B. As speed zones – based on engineering studies.


'''Guidance.'''  Unless otherwise stated in this article for a specific sign or as stated in the Option below, phone numbers with more than four characters should not be shown on any sign, supplemental plaque, sign panel (including LOGO panels on specific service signs) or changeable message sign.
State statutory limits restrict the maximum speed limit that can be established on a particular road, notwithstanding what an engineering study might indicate. Maximum speed limits in Missouri are governed by the Missouri Revised Statutes, Section 304.010.


'''Option.'''  Internet addresses or phone numbers with more than four characters may be shown on signs, supplemental plaques, sign panels, and changeable message signs that are intended for viewing only by pedestrians, bicyclists, occupants of parked vehicles, or drivers of vehicles on low-speed roadways where engineering judgment indicates that drivers can reasonably safely stop out of the traffic flow to read the message.  Otherwise, internet addresses are not shown on any sign, supplemental plaque, sign panel (including LOGO panels on specific service signs) or changeable message sign.  MoDOT may develop special word message signs in situations where roadway conditions make it necessary to provide road users with additional regulatory, warning, or guidance information.
MoDOT can establish non-statutory speed limits or designate reduced speed zones using an engineering study. Setting appropriate speed limits is especially important to ensure safety for all road users in varying types of contexts, particularly on roadways where adjacent land use suggests that trips could be served by varied modes. These situations include urban and suburban non-freeway arterials or rural arterials that serve as main streets in smaller communities, consistent with the context classifications of urban core, urban, suburban, and rural towns found in “A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets,” 2018 Edition, AASHTO. When setting a speed limit, a range of factors such as land-use context, pedestrian and bicyclist activity, crash history, intersection spacing, driveway density, roadway geometry, roadside conditions, roadway functional classification, traffic volume, and observed speeds can influence the speed limit determined in the engineering study. The engineering study will determine which of the recommended factors will prevail in setting the speed limit.  


==903.1.13 Types of Fabricated Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.06a)==
MoDOT can use speed limit setting tools and methods such as expert systems and those consistent with the safe system approach as part of the required engineering study for a non-statutory speed limit. As speed limit setting tools vary, practitioners needs to be aware of their limitations and advantages, possible variation between the tools and the need to explore gaps or weaknesses of tools, and weigh the output accordingly in consideration of setting speed limits.  


'''Support.''' There are two types of sign material available, [[903.4 Guide Signs#903.4.1.5 Legend Types|structural (ST) and sheet (SH)]].
To achieve desired operating speeds, agencies often implement other speed management strategies concurrently with setting speed limits, such as traffic calming measures, geometric design features, and increased enforcement. See [[905.2 Traffic Studies #905.2.14|EPG 905.2.14]] for more information regarding speed limit guidelines.


Sheet signs are sheet aluminum, usually one-piece units, and have several available thicknesses as indicated in the standard plans.
'''Standard. '''Speed zones (other than statutory speed limits) shall only be established on the basis of an engineering study that has been performed in accordance with traffic engineering practices. The engineering study shall consider the roadway context.  


Structural signs are usually made of multiple 1-foot tall extruded panels, custom sized to the necessary width.  These signs are used primarily for guide signs on expressways and freeways, but may be found on other routes on a limited basis, and are used on all overhead-mounted signs, including “LOW CLEARANCE” and exit number panels, signs greater than 6 ft. in width, and signs greater than 30 sq. ft. in area.
'''Guidance. '''Among the factors that should be considered when conducting an engineering study for establishing or reevaluating speed limits within speed zones are the following:
::A. Roadway environment (such as roadside development, number and frequency of driveways and access points, and land use), functional classification, public transit volume and location or frequency of stops, parking practices, and pedestrian and bicycle facilities and activity;
::B. Roadway characteristics (such as lane widths, shoulder condition, grade, alignment, median type, and sight distance);
::C. Geographic context (such as an urban district, rural town center, non-urbanized rural area, or suburban area), and multi-modal trip generation;
::D. Reported crash experience for at least a 12-month period;
::E. Speed distribution of free-flowing vehicles including the pace, median (50th-percentile), and 85th-percentile speeds; and
::F. A review of past speed studies to identify any trends in operating speeds.


Extruded panel signs are structural signs composed of an aluminum substrate, made up of 1 ft. tall “E” shaped aluminum panels, assembled to a desired height and cut to a uniform width for each sign. These panels are bolted together to form the larger “blank” substrate needed for a large sign.
When the 85th-percentile speed is appreciably greater than the posted speed limit, and the roadway context does not support setting a higher speed limit, the engineering study should consider whether changes to geometric features, enforcement, and/or other speed-reduction countermeasures might improve compliance with the posted speed limit. A similar approach should be used if the results of past speed studies indicate that the 85th-percentile speed has consistently increased.


Extruded sheet signs are structural signs composed of aluminum sheets welded to extruded aluminum-strengthening bars.  The bars are oriented horizontally.  This type of sign is typically found on large LOGO signing.
On urban and suburban arterials, and on rural arterials that serve as main streets through developed areas of communities, the 85th-percentile speed should not be used to set speed limits without consideration of all factors described in the first Guidance paragraph of this article.  


Overlay of existing extruded panel is a thin aluminum substrate applied over an existing sign face.  The overlay duplicates all legend and characters on the original sign face.  This is a cost-effective method to refurbish structural signs. An extruded panel sign should be only overlaid once.
On a freeway, expressway, or rural highway (outside urbanized locations or conditions), the speed limit that is posted within a speed zone should be within 5 mph of the 85th-percentile speed of free-flowing motor-vehicle traffic under the following conditions:
::A. All factors described in the first Guidance paragraph of this article have been considered and determined to be non-mitigating, and
::B. The measures described in the second Guidance paragraph of this article have been considered to the extent practicable.  


Welded-stud panel signs are structural signs composed of aluminum sheets with aluminum bolt studs welded to the back of the sheets. These studs serve as fasteners to which splice plates and mounting brackets are secured. Welded-stud panel signs are no longer fabricated.
See  [[905.2 Traffic Studies #905.2.14|EPG 905.2.14]] for additional information regarding setting speed limits


'''Option.'''  As an alternative to structural sign replacement, a sign overlay may be ordered.  Any extruded panel sign may receive an overlay.  
MoDOT should conduct engineering studies to reevaluate non-statutory speed limits on segments of their roadways that have undergone significant changes since the last review (such as changes to roadway context, the addition or elimination of parking or driveways, changes in the number of travel lanes, changes in the configuration of bicycle lanes, changes to road geometrics, changes in traffic control signal coordination, or significant changes in traffic volumes).


'''Standard.'''  Any demountable legend should be removed prior to the installation of the new overlay panels.
Speed studies for signalized intersection approaches should be taken outside the influence area of the traffic control signal, which is generally considered to be approximately ½ mile, to avoid obtaining skewed results for the speed distribution. If the signal spacing is less than 1 mile, the speed study should be at approximately the middle of the segment.


Extruded sheet signs and welded-stud panel signs shall not be overlaid.
'''Standard. '''The Speed Limit (R2-1) sign shall display the limit established by law, ordinance, regulation, or as adopted by the authorized agency based on an engineering study. The speed limits displayed shall be in multiples of 5 mph.


Welded-stud panel signs shall be replaced with extruded panel signs at the end of the useful life of their sheeting and/or legend.
Speed Limit (R2-1) signs, indicating speed limits for which posting is required by law, shall be located at the points of change from one speed limit to another.


==903.1.14 Changeable/Dynamic Message Signs (CMS/DMS) (MUTCD Section 2A.07)==
At the downstream end of the section to which a particular speed limit applies, a Speed Limit sign showing the next speed limit shall be installed.  
[[image:903.1.14 Dynamic Message Sign.jpg|right|250px|thumb|<center>'''Dynamic Message Sign'''</center>]]
'''Standard.'''  As far as is practical, changeable message signs, traffic control devices designed to display variable messages, shall conform to the principles established in this article and with the design and applications prescribed in [[903.8 Freeway and Expressway Guide Signs#903.8.27 Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Section 2E.21)|EPG 903.8.27 Changeable Message Signs for freeway and expressway guide signs]] and the [http://www.modot.org/business/manuals/trafficcontrol.htm Traffic Control for Field Operations].


Messages displayed shall convey pertinent information to assist motorists in their driving decisions.  Messages shall be conveyed in a standard, non-confusing manner that allows drivers to both perceive and react to the information in a timely fashion.
Speed Limit signs indicating the statutory speed limits shall be installed at entrances to Missouri and at city limits, where appropriate.


The district engineer shall authorize the use of all CMS/DMS, both state and contractor furnished. Access to the CMS/DMS shall only be given to responsible individuals.  The district engineer shall ensure that efforts are coordinated such that motorists are informed of the most critical information based on priority of messages listed below.
'''Guidance'''. Additional Speed Limit signs should be installed beyond interchanges and major intersections and at other locations where it is necessary to remind road users of the speed limit that is applicable.  


Messages shall be displayed on stationary DMS according to the priorities listed below.  When a stationary DMS is not being used to display one of these message types, it shall either remain blank or display a simple character to indicate to motorists that the sign is operational but no action message is currently necessary.
Speed Limit signs should not be located at curves or other locations where the legal speed limit is greater than the safe operating speed. If Speed Limit signs are installed on the same sign supports and above a City Limit sign, the sign supports should be sized to properly support both signs.


A DMS shall not advertise or promote commercial events or entities and shall only display messages pertaining to highway safety or congestion reduction. A DMS shall not repeat guide sign, regulatory sign or warning sign messages.
The following are recommended locations for posting a Speed Limit sign:
::A. Downstream from all acceleration ramps on the freeway/expressway system, posted after the route confirmation marker, if space allows;
::B. Downstream from major intersections such as state system junctions, signalized intersections, and major county road junctions;
::C. Where it is necessary to remind road users of the speed limit that is applicable;
::D. In each direction of travel for road users leaving the Interstate system onto a state route. The sign should be located, if practical, approximately 400 ft. beyond the route confirmation assembly. If the crossroad is not located on the state system, the proper jurisdiction should be notified; or
::E. When the speed limit is reduced on the freeway/expressway, an additional sign should be posted in the median.


Types of messages conveyed on stationary DMS have the following priority:
'''Support. '''The “Traffic Control Devices Handbook – 2nd Edition, 2013, ITE.” contains suggested criteria on the spacing of speed limit signs.


A. Emergencies such as evacuations or closures required by MoDOT, the Emergency
[[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.32|EPG 903.3.32]] contains information about the use of speed zone signs to inform road users of a reduced or variable speed zone to provide advance notice to comply with the posted speed limit ahead.
Management Agency (SEMA), local law enforcement or the military.
[[image:903.1.14 Severe Weather.jpg|right|thumb|<center>'''Severe Weather'''</center>|145px]]
B.  Hazardous and/or uncommon road conditions, which require motorists to alter their driving, such as severe weather conditions, collisions, work zone activities or other incidents.


C. Traveler information and suggested alternate routes for delays and/or congestion caused by planned or unplanned incidents.
'''Option. '''If a W3-5b sign is posted to provide notice of a variable speed zone, an END VARIABLE SPEED LIMIT (R2-13) sign may be installed at the downstream end of the zone to provide notice to road users of the termination of the speed zone.


D. Advance notice for scheduled incidents such as lane closures, road closures, moving operations or special events.
Advance traffic control warning signs (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.29|EPG 903.2.29]]), intersection warning signs (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.33|EPG 903.3.33]]), and/or other traffic control devices are appropriate warning prior to a signalized intersection.  A Speed Limit sign should not be used for this purpose.


Messages shall be displayed on portable CMS according to the priorities listed belowWhen a portable CMS is not being used to display one of these message types, the board shall be turned parallel to traffic or the CMS removed.
'''Guidance. '''An advisory speed plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]]) mounted below a warning sign should be used to warn road users of an advisory speed for a roadway condition. A Speed Limit sign should not be used for this purpose.


CMS shall not be used to convey the same message for an extended period of time that could be conveyed with a conventional guide sign, regulatory sign or warning sign.  
'''Option. '''A variable speed limit sign that changes the speed limit for traffic and ambient conditions may be installed provided that the appropriate speed limit is displayed at the proper times and locations in accordance with the third and fourth Guidance paragraphs of this article.
 
'''Standard. '''The variable speed limit sign legend “SPEED LIMIT” shall be a black legend on a white retroreflective background. The variable speed limit legend shall be displayed in white LEDs on an opaque black background.
 
'''Support. ''' [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.13|EPG 903.3.13]] contains information about the use of a Vehicle Speed Feedback plaque mounted below a Speed Limit sign that displays to approaching drivers the speed at which they are traveling.
 
Advisory speed signs and plaques are discussed in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.12|EPG 903.3.12]] and [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|903.3.59]]. Temporary traffic control zone speed signs are discussed in [[:Category:616 Temporary Traffic Control (MUTCD Part 6)|EPG 616]]. The WORK ZONE (G20-5aP) plaque intended for installation above a Speed Limit sign is discussed in [[616.7 TTC Zone Regulatory Signs (MUTCD Chapter 6G) #616.7.7|EPG 616.7.7]]. School Speed Limit signs are discussed in [[908.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 7B) #908.2.5|EPG 908.2.5]]. 
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.21}}903.2.21  Combined Maximum and Minimum Speed Limits Sign (R2-4a) (MUTCD Section 2B.24)==
 
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|[[image:R2-4a.png|left|thumb|150px|<center>'''R2-4a'''</center>]]
|}


Types of messages conveyed on portable CMS shall have the following priority:
'''Standard. '''Combined Maximum and Minimum Speed Limits (R2-4a) signs shall be installed only on interstate routes in lieu of Speed Limit (R2-1) signs to designate the maximum and minimum speed limits that apply.  
[[image:903.1.14 Military.jpg|right|thumb|<center>'''Military'''</center>|105px]]
A.  Emergencies such as evacuations or closures required by MoDOT, the State
Emergency Management Agency (SEMA), local law enforcement or the military.


B. Hazardous and/or uncommon road conditions, which require motorists to alter their driving, such as severe weather conditions, collisions, work zone activities or other incidents.
'''Guidance. '''The Combined Maximum and Minimum Speed Limits sign should be located in the same manner as Speed Limit signs (See [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.9|EPG 903.2.9]]). Additionally, the R2-4a sign should be installed on interstate routes at entrances to Missouri and where interstate routes cross county lines. '''


CShort term detours (mandatory) for a partial audience for which no other signing is in place.
=={{SpanID|903.2.22}}903.2.22 Speed Limit XX Except Where Posted Sign (R2-5d)==


D. Traveler information and suggested alternate routes for delays and/or congestion caused by planned or unplanned incidents.
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|[[image:R2-5d.png|left|thumb|150px|<center>'''R2-5d'''</center>]]
|}


E. Advance notice for scheduled incidents such as lane closures, road closures, moving operations, or newly installed 4-way stops or signals.
'''Standard. '''The SPEED LIMIT XX EXCEPT WHERE POSTED (R2-5d) sign shall be installed only at locations where it has been requested and is required by an enabling ordinance.


A CMS shall not advertise or promote commercial events or entities. Only messages that pertain to highway safety or congestion reduction shall be displayed.  If it is anticipated that a public or commercial event will generate a large volume of traffic or create congestion problems, a CMS may be used to facilitate traffic flow during the event but shall not advertise the event.
'''Guidance. '''The SPEED LIMIT XX EXCEPT WHERE POSTED sign should be placed immediately to the right of the City Limit sign on its own post.


A portable CMS is normally used to warn motorists of specific emergencies, active work zones, hazardous road conditions and unexpected detours. A CMS used in situations such as these shall not be used to display child abduction alert messages.
'''Option. '''The SPEED LIMIT XX EXCEPT WHERE POSTED sign may be used on all state highways and outer roads except the Interstate system.


A portable CMS used for a child abduction alert message shall be programmed and installed at an appropriate location in a timely manner (within one hour of the abduction notification), and follow the guidelines in [[616.23 Traffic Control for Field Operations|Traffic Control for Field Operations]].
=={{SpanID|903.2.23}}903.2.23  Higher Fines Signs and Plaque (MUTCD Section 2B.25)==


Using a portable CMS to display a child abduction alert message shall follow the requirements and procedures outlined above for stationary DMS, except that the district engineer or designated person or persons shall be responsible for determining the availability, use and cancellation of the CMS for this purpose.
'''Support. '''See [[907.3 Travel Safe Zones #907.3|EPG 907.3]] for information on Travel Safe Zones.


'''Guidance.''' If a child abduction occurs and it meets the local AMBER Plan Program’s criteria for triggering an alert, a child abduction alert (AMBER Alert) message should be displayed on all stationary DMS in the area of the abduction.  If one of the above types of messages is currently being displayed on a stationary DMS, a child abduction alert message should be alternated with that message until the child abduction alert is cancelled.
=={{SpanID|903.2.24}}903.2.24 Movement Prohibition Signs (R3-1 through R3-4, R3-18, and R3-27) (MUTCD Section 2B.26)==


MoDOT’s Traffic Management Center (TMC) Manager or similar district position should work with local law enforcement to determine an appropriate child abduction alert message that conveys necessary information but does not create an adverse traffic impact such as queues, unexpected slowing of traffic, etc.
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|[[image:R3-1.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-1'''</center>|95px]]
||[[image:R3-2.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-2'''</center>|95px]]
||[[image:R3-3.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-3'''</center>|95px]]
||[[image:R3-4.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-4'''</center>|95px]]
||[[image:R3-18.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-18'''</center>|95px]]
||[[image:R3-27.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-27'''</center>|95px]]
|}


The following display messages should be programmed and displayed for a child abduction alert:
'''Standard. '''Movement Prohibition signs shall be installed where specific movements are prohibited at an intersection approach except as provided in the second Option and fourth Standard paragraphs of this article.


::::::MISSING
'''Support. '''Missouri Statute 304.341, which governs U-turn Movements at signalized intersections, states: It shall be unlawful for the driver of any vehicle to turn such vehicle so as to proceed in the opposite direction at any intersection controlled by a traffic signal or police officer; nor shall such turn be made at any place unless the movement can be made in safety and without interfering with other traffic.


::::::CHILD
Missouri Statute 304.120 allows municipalities, by ordinance, to make additional rules of the road or traffic regulations to meet their needs and traffic conditions, which would allow U-turn Movements to be permitted at certain unsignalized intersections.


::::::ALERT
'''Guidance. '''Movement Prohibition signs should only be used to prohibit a turn or through movement from an entire approach and should not be used to designate movements that are required or permitted from a specific lane or lanes on a multi-lane approach.


Movement Prohibition signs should be placed where they will be most easily seen by road users who might be intending to make the movement.


::::::TUNE TO
If a No Right Turn (R3-1) sign is used, at least one should be placed either over the roadway or at a right-hand corner of the intersection.


::::::LOCAL
If a No Left Turn (R3-2) sign is used, at least one should be placed over the roadway, at the far left corner of the intersection, on a median, or in conjunction with the STOP sign or YIELD sign located on the near right corner.


::::::MEDIA
Except as provided in Item C of the third Standard paragraph of this article for signalized locations, if a NO TURNS (R3-3) sign is used, two signs should be used, one at a location specified for a No Right Turn sign and one at a location specified for a No Left Turn sign.


Except for safety or transportation-related messages, changeable message signs should not be used to display information other than regulatory, warning, and guidance information related to traffic control.
If a No U-Turn (R3-4) sign or a combination No U or Left Turn (R3-18) sign is used, at least one should be used at a location specified for a No Left Turn sign.


'''Support.'''  The following display message is an example of a generic AMBER Alert message that could be programmed.
The No U-Turn sign (R3-4) should be used sparingly and only where a specific problem has been documented and not as standard practice for median breaks. If used, these signs should be placed at or between intersections to indicate where U-turns are prohibited.


::::::CHILD ABDUCTION ALERT
If both left turns and U-turns are prohibited, the combination No U or Left Turn (R3-18) sign should be used instead of separate R3-2 and R3-4 signs.


::::::TUNE TO LOCAL MEDIA
'''Standard. '''The No U-Turn sign shall be installed above the AUTHORIZED AND EMERGENCY VEHICLES ONLY (R5-29) sign (See [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.36|EPG 903.2.36]]).


::::::FOR UPDATES
'''Support. ''' [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.25|EPG 903.2.25]] through [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.28|EPG 903.2.28]] contain information regarding lane control signs that indicate the required or permitted movements from individual lanes.


Changeable message signs with more sophisticated technologies are gaining widespread use to inform road users of variable situations, particularly along congested traffic corridors.  
'''Guidance. '''If a No Straight Through (R3-27) sign is used, at least one should be placed either over the roadway or at a location where it can be seen by road users who might be intending to travel straight through the intersection.


Information regarding the design and application of portable changeable message signs in temporary traffic control zones is contained in [[616.3 Changeable Message Signs (CMS)|EPG 616.3 Changeable Message Signs]] and [[616.23 Traffic Control for Field Operations|MoDOT Traffic Control for Field Operations]].  [[903.19 Highway Signing General Information#903.19.14 Abbreviations Used on Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD Section 1A.14)|EPG 903.19.14 Abbreviations Used on Traffic Control Devices]], contains information regarding the use of abbreviations on traffic control devices, including changeable message signs.
If turn prohibition signs are installed in conjunction with traffic control signals:
::A. The No Right Turn sign should be installed adjacent to a signal face viewed by road users in the right-hand lane.
::B. The No Left Turn (or No U-Turn or combination No U or Left Turn) sign should be installed adjacent to a signal face viewed by road users in the left-hand lane.
::C. A NO TURNS sign should be placed adjacent to a signal face viewed by all road users on that approach, or two signs should be used.


'''Option.''' Changeable message signs (including portable changeable message signs) that display a regulatory or warning message may use a black background with a white, yellow, orange, red, or fluorescent yellow-green legend as appropriate, except where specifically restricted for a particular sign.
'''Option. '''If turn prohibition signs are installed in conjunction with traffic control signals, an additional turn prohibition sign may be post-mounted to supplement the sign mounted overhead.


Changeable message signs, both permanent and portable, may be used by MoDOT to display safety or transportation-related messages.
Where ONE WAY signs are used (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.40|EPG 903.2.40]]), No Left Turn and No Right Turn signs may be omitted.


CMS and DMS may be used to effectively reduce congestion caused by planned events or unplanned incidents such as excessive daily traffic, accidents, detours, construction delays, etc. Once a driver population has gained confidence that messages are reliable and relay pertinent information that assists in reducing delays, CMS and DMS may be used to convey information to alter traffic patterns or modes of transportation.
Where the movement restriction applies to certain vehicle classes, signs incorporating a supplementary legend, modified as appropriate, may be used to indicate the specific vehicle class restriction or exception. When the movement restriction applies during certain time periods only, the following Movement Prohibition signing alternatives may be used and are listed in order of preference:
::A. A blank-out or changeable message sign (see Chapter 2L) that displays the prohibited movement only during the time that the movement prohibition is applicable, especially at signalized intersections.
::B. Permanently-mounted signs incorporating a supplementary legend showing the hours and days during which the prohibition is applicable. Contact the Highway Safety and Traffic Division for the design of supplementary legends and plaques.
::C. Portable signs, installed by proper authority, located off the roadway at each corner of the intersection. The portable signs are only to be used during the time that the movement prohibition is applicable.


The district engineer may designate a person, or persons, to be responsible for the authorization of use, messages to be displayed, and the care, maintenance and security of the CMS/DMS.  This person, or persons, may delegate certain responsibilities in regard to the CMS/DMS, but shall ensure that any personnel given access to the CMS/DMS understands and adheres to both this policy and applicable MUTCD requirements.
'''Standard. '''The blank-out part-time electronic-display Movement Prohibition sign shall consist of a red circle and diagonal with a white prohibited movement on an opaque black background.


Other public information that assists MoDOT in improving highway safety and reducing congestion may be displayed after careful consideration.  The message shall, however, require motorists to alter their driving, and direct approval by the district engineer or authorized designee must be received prior to displaying the message.
'''Option. '''Movement Prohibition signs may be omitted at a ramp entrance to an expressway or a channelized intersection where the design is such as to indicate clearly the one-way traffic movement on the ramp or turning lane.


If a portable CMS is not being used to improve traffic safety, it may be used to display a child abduction alert message.
'''Standard. '''The No Left Turn (R3-2) sign, the No U-Turn (R3-4) sign, and the combination No U or Left Turn (R3-18) sign shall not be used at approaches to roundabouts to prohibit drivers from turning left onto the circulatory roadway of a roundabout.
[[image:903.1.14 stadium event.jpg|right|225px|thumb|<center>'''Stadium event'''</center>]]
'''Support.''' Examples of safety messages include SEAT BELTS BUCKLED? and DON’T DRINK AND DRIVE.  Examples of transportation-related messages include STADIUM EVENT SUNDAY, EXPECT DELAYS NOON TO 4 PM and OZONE ALERT CODE RED—USE TRANSIT.


'''Guidance.''' When a CMS is used to display a safety or transportation-related message the message should be simple, brief, legible and clear.  A CMS should not be used to display a safety or transportation-related message if doing so would adversely affect the respect for the sign. “CONGESTION AHEAD” or other overly simplistic or vague messages should not be displayed alone.  These messages should be supplemented with a message on the location or distance to the congestion or incident, how much delay is expected, alternative route or other similar messages.
'''Support. '''At roundabouts, the use of R3-2, R3-4, or R3-18 signs to prohibit left turns onto the circulatory roadway might confuse drivers about the possible legal turning movements around the roundabout. ONE WAY (R6-1 or R6-2) signs are appropriate to indicate the travel direction within a roundabout.


'''Standard.'''  When a CMS is used to display a safety or transportation-related message, the display format shall not be of a type that could be considered similar to advertising displays.  The display format shall not include animation, rapid flashing or other dynamic elements that are characteristic of sports scoreboards or advertising displays.
=={{SpanID|903.2.25}}903.2.25 Intersection Lane Control Signs (R3-5 through R3-8) (MUTCD Section 2B.27)==


==903.1.15 Retroreflectivity and Illumination (MUTCD Section 2A.08)==
'''Standard. '''Intersection Lane Control signs, if used, shall require road users in certain lanes to turn, shall permit turns from a lane where such turns would otherwise not be permitted, shall require a road user to stay in the same lane and proceed straight through an intersection, or shall indicate permitted movements from a lane.
[[image:903.1.15.jpg|right|400px]]
'''Support.''' There are many materials currently available for retroreflection and various methods currently available for the illumination of signs.  New materials and methods continue to emerge.  New materials and methods can be used as long as the signs meet the standard requirements for color, both by day and by night.


There are two types of reflective sheeting available to MoDOT: [[903.4 Guide Signs#903.4.1.5 Legend Types|high intensity (R2) and microprismatic (R4)]].  For special sign designs, the type of reflective sheeting is noted on the special sign detail sheet (indicated as “BACKGROUND”).
Intersection Lane Control signs shall not be used in lieu of turn prohibition signs, such as No Right-Turn (R3-1).


'''Standard.''' Regulatory, warning, and guide signs shall be [http://www.trafficsign.us/reflidguide.pdf retroreflective] or illuminated to show the same shape and similar color by both day and night, unless specifically stated otherwise in this article about a particular sign or group of signs.
'''Support. '''Intersection Lane Control signs have three applications:
::A. Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-5 series and R3-7 series) signs,
::B. Optional Movement Lane Control (R3-6 series) signs, and
::C. Advance Intersection Lane Control (R3-8 series) signs.


The requirements for sign illumination shall not be considered to be satisfied by street or highway lighting.
'''Guidance. '''When Intersection Lane Control signs are mounted overhead, each sign used should be placed over the lane or a projection of the lane to which it applies.  


'''Guidance.'''  R2 sheeting should be used on all sign backgrounds. R4 sheeting should be used on all legend and symbols on guide signs.
On signalized approaches where through lanes that become mandatory turn lanes, multiple-lane turns that include shared lanes for through and turning movements, ramps with two or more lanes or other lane-use regulations are present that would be unexpected by unfamiliar road users, overhead Intersection Lane Control signs should be installed approximately 250 ft. in advance of the stop bar over the appropriate lanes. A one-arm cantilever tubular truss to support these signs should be used to eliminate an obstacle on one side of the roadway.


Overhead sign installations should not be illuminated unless an engineering study shows a need for illumination, i.e. fog prone areas.
'''Option. '''A signal mast arm design (without signal head) may be used to mount Intersection Lane Control signs, which allows a longer arm than standard one or two arm tubular sign supports. The upright post may be placed on either side of the roadway, and if possible, placed so that roadway geometrics draw traffic away from the post and footing.


'''Option.''' Light-emitting diode (LED) units may be used individually within the face of a standard highway sign and in the border of a standard highway sign, except for Changeable Message Signs, to improve the conspicuity, increase the legibility of sign legends and borders or provide a changeable message.  Individual LED pixels may be used in the border of a sign.
'''Guidance. '''The Left Only (R3-5L) sign should be installed on the back side of the mast arms over the left turn lanes where practical.


'''Standard.'''  If used, the LEDs shall be the same color as the standard highway sign legend, border, or background. If flashed, all LED units shall flash simultaneously at a rate of more than 50 and less than 60 times per minute.  The uniformity of the sign design shall be maintained without any decrease in visibility, legibility or driver comprehension during either daytime or nighttime conditions.
Where overhead mounting on the approach is impracticable for the Advance and/or Intersection Lane Control signs, one of the following alternatives should be employed:
::A. At locations where through lanes become mandatory turn lanes, a Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-7) sign should be post-mounted on the left-hand side of the roadway where a through lane is becoming a mandatory left-turn lane on a one-way street or where a median of sufficient width for the signs is available, or on the right-hand side of the roadway where a through lane is becoming a mandatory right-turn lane.
::B. At locations where a through lane is becoming a mandatory left-turn lane on a two-way street where a median of sufficient width for the signs is not available, and at locations where multiple-lane turns that include shared lanes for through and turning movements are present, an Advance Intersection Lane Control (R3-8 series) sign should be post-mounted in a prominent location in advance of the intersection, and consideration should be given to the use of an oversized version in accordance with [[#tab903.2.3|Table 903.2.3]].


A module of multiple LED units used as a closely spaced, single light source shall only be used within the sign face for legends or symbols.
Use of an overhead sign for one approach lane should not require installation of overhead signs for the other lanes of that approach.  


'''Support.''' Information regarding the use of retroreflective material on the sign support is contained in [[903.2 Ground-Mounted Signing#903.2.14 Posts and Mounting|Posts and Mounting]].
'''Option. '''Intersection Lane Control signs may be omitted where:
::A. A turn bay has been provided by physical construction or pavement markings, and
::B. Only the road users using such turn bays are permitted to make a turn in that direction.


==903.1.16  Minimum Retroreflectivity Levels  (MUTCD Section 2A.09)==
'''Standard. '''Except as provided in the last paragraph of this article, at roundabouts, Intersection Lane Control (R3-5, R3-6, and R3-8 series) signs shall display curved-stem arrow symbols as shown in [[#fig903.2.25|Figure 903.2.25]].
Reserved for future text depending on FHWA rulemaking.


'''Option. '''Normal-stem arrow symbol options may be displayed on Intersection Lane Control (R3-5, R3-6, and R3-8 series) signs at roundabouts where they more effectively indicate road geometry based on engineering judgment.


==903.1.17 Shapes (MUTCD Section 2A.10)==
{{SpanID|fig903.2.25}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.25 Intersection Lane Control Signal Arrow Options for Roundabouts.jpg|center|thumb|alt=A: The first example shows a vertical black curved-stem arrow curving up and then slightly to the right and then to the left. Three “match arrows with desired lane-use configuration” are shown attached to the black arrows. One is attached to the arrow indicating a left-turn maneuver. One is attached to the arrow indicating a through maneuver. One is attached to the arrow indicating a right-turn maneuver.
B: The second example shows a vertical black normal-stem arrow curving up and to the left. The arrow is shown curving around an “optional for left-most lane” circle. Three “match arrows with desired lane-use configuration” are shown attached to the black arrows. One is attached to the arrow indicating a left-turn maneuver. One is attached to the arrow indicating a through maneuver. One is attached to the arrow indicating a right-turn maneuver.|800px|'''Figure 903.2.25''' Intersection Lane Control Signal Arrow Options for Roundabouts]]


'''Standard.''' Specific shapes, as shown below, shall be exclusively used for specific signs or series of signs unless stated otherwise about a particular sign or class of signs.
=={{SpanID|903.2.26}}903.2.26 Mandatory Movement Lane Control Signs (R3-5, R3-5a, and R3-7) and Plaques (MUTCD Section 2B.28)==


====<center>''Table 903.1.17 Use of Sign Shapes''</center>====
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|+
! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Shape !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Signs
|-
|-
| Octagon|| * Stop
||[[File:R3-5.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-5'''</center>|105px]]
||[[File:R3-5a.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-5a'''</center>|95px]]
||[[File:R3-7L.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-7L'''</center>|130px]]
||[[File:R3-7R.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-7R'''</center>|130px]]
|}
 
'''Standard. '''Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-5, R3-5a, and R3-7) signs, if used, shall indicate only the single vehicle movement that is required from the lane.
 
The Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-5 and R3-5a) symbol signs shall include the legend ONLY and shall be mounted overhead over the specific lanes to which they apply (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.25|EPG 903.2.25]]). The R3-7 sign shall be for post-mounting only. The R3-7 sign shall not be mounted at the far side of the intersection.
 
If used, the Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-7) sign shall be located in advance of the intersection, such as near the upstream end of the mandatory movement lane, and/or at the near side of the intersection where the regulation applies.
 
The use of the Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-7) word message sign shall be limited to only locations where through lanes approaching an intersection become mandatory turn lanes.
 
Mandatory Movement Lane Control Signs shall not be used on roadways with speed limits 50 mph or greater. Contact Highway Safety and Traffic Division for alternatives when speed limits are 50 mph or greater.
 
'''Guidance. '''Mandatory Movement Lane Control signs should be accompanied by lane-use arrow markings, especially where traffic volumes are high, where there is a high percentage of commercial vehicles, or where other distractions exist.
 
'''Option. '''The Through Only (R3-5a) sign may be used to require a road user in a particular lane to proceed straight through an intersection.
 
On an approach to a mandatory turn lane where traffic regularly enters the shoulder to access the turn lane inappropriately, creating safety or operational issues, a DO NOT DRIVE ON SHOULDER (R4-17) sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.35|EPG 903.2.35]]) may be used to supplement the standard Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-5 and/or R3-7 series) signs.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.27}}903.2.27  Optional Movement Lane Control Signs (R3-6 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.29)==
 
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|-
|Equilateral Triangle (1 point down)|| * Yield
||[[image:R3-6.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-6'''</center>|130px]]
||[[image:R3-6a.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-6a'''</center>|130px]]
||[[image:R3-6b.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-6b'''</center>|130px]]
|}
 
'''Standard. '''Optional Movement Lane Control (R3-6, R3-6a and R3-6b) signs, if used, shall be used for two or more movements from a specific lane or to emphasize permitted movements. The Optional Movement Lane Control sign shall be mounted overhead over the specific lane to which it applies.
 
If used, the Optional Movement Lane Control signs shall indicate all permissible movements from specific lanes.
 
Because more than one movement is permitted from the lane, the word message ONLY shall not be used on an Optional Movement Lane Control sign.
 
Optional Movement Lane Control signs shall be used for two or more movements from a specific lane where a movement, not allowed by State statute or local ordinance, is permitted.
 
The Optional Movement Lane Control signs shall not be used alone to effect a turn prohibition.
 
'''Guidance. '''If used, the Optional Movement Lane Control sign should be located overhead in advance of the intersection, such as near the upstream end of an adjacent mandatory movement lane, and/or overhead at the intersection where the regulation applies.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.28}}903.2.28  Advance Intersection Lane Control Signs (R3-8 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.30)==
 
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align: center;"
|-
|-
|Circle|| * Highway-Rail Grade Crossing      (Advance Warning)
||[[image:R3-8.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-8'''</center>|130px]]
||[[image:R3-8a.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-8a'''</center>|195px]]
||[[image:R3-8b.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-8b'''</center>|195px]]
|-
|-
|Pennant Shape/Isosceles Triangle        (longer axis horizontal)||* No Passing
||[[image:R3-8xa.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-8xa'''</center>|195px]]
||[[image:R3-8xb.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-8xb'''</center>|195px]]
||[[image:R3-8xc.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-8xc'''</center>|195px]]
|}
 
'''Option. '''Advance Intersection Lane Control (R3-8, R3-8a, and R3-8b) signs may be used to indicate the configuration of all lanes ahead.
 
The word message ONLY or the bicycle symbol, may be used within the border in combination with the arrow symbols of the R3-8 sign series.
 
Where a bicycle lane is between two general-purpose lanes the R3-8 series signs may be modified to show the bicycle lane with a white legend on a black background in accordance with designs of the R3-8x series signs (see [[914.2 Regulatory Signs (MUTCD Chapter 9B) #914.2.2|EPG 914.2.2]]).
 
'''Guidance. '''When used, an Advance Intersection Lane Control sign should be placed at an adequate distance in advance of the intersection, either along the lane tapers or at the beginning of the turn lane so that road users can select the appropriate lane.
 
'''Option. '''An Advance Intersection Lane Control sign may be repeated closer to the intersection along the approach for additional emphasis.
 
'''Standard. '''An Advance Intersection Lane Control (R3-8 series) sign shall not be mounted at the far side of an intersection to which it applies.
 
Where three or more approach lanes are available to traffic, Advance Intersection Lane Control (R3-8 series) signs, if used, shall be post-mounted in advance of the intersection and shall not be mounted overhead.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.29}}903.2.29  Two-Way Left-Turn-Only Signs (R3-9a and R3-9b) and Plaques (MUTCD Section 2B.32)==
 
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|-
|Pentagon (Pointed up)|| * School Advance Warning sign
||[[File:R3-9a.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-9a'''</center>|105px]]
||[[File:R3-9b.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-9b'''</center>|85px]]
|}
 
'''Support. '''Missouri Statute 300.215, which governs two-way left turn lane movements states:
 
Designated two-way left turn lanes: Where a special lane for making left turns by drivers proceeding in opposite directions have been indicated by official traffic control devices:
 
::A. A left turn shall not be made from any other lane;
 
::B. A vehicle shall not be driven in the lane except when preparing for or making a left turn from or into the roadway or when preparing for or making a U-turn when otherwise permitted by law;
 
::C. A vehicle shall not be driven in the lane for a distance more than five hundred feet.
 
'''Standard. '''Two-Way Left Turn Only (R3-9a) signs shall be used for overhead installation only. Center Lane Only (R3-9b) signs shall be post mounted installations.
 
'''Guidance. '''A Two-Way Left-Turn-Only (R3-9a or R3-9b) sign should be used in conjunction with the required pavement markings where a non-reversible lane is reserved for the exclusive use of left-turning vehicles in either direction and is not used for passing, overtaking, or through travel.
 
'''Option. '''The post-mounted R3-9b sign may be used as an alternate to or a supplement to the overhead R3-9a sign
 
Additional R3-9b signs may be installed after major intersections, or in situations that require additional emphasis of the proper use of this lane.
 
'''Support. '''Signing is especially helpful to drivers in areas where the two-way left-turn-only maneuver is new, in areas subject to environmental conditions that frequently obscure the pavement markings, and on peripheral streets with two-way left-turn-only lanes leading to an extensive system of routes with two-way left-turn-only lanes.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.30}}903.2.30 Jughandle Signs (R3-23, R3-24, R3-25, and R3-26 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.35)==
 
'''Guidance. '''There are limited cases where these signs are applicable to the MoDOT system. Any use of these signs requires authorization from the Highway Safety and Traffic Division.'''
 
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.31}}903.2.31  DO NOT PASS Sign (R4-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.36)==
 
[[File:R4-1.gif|center|thumb|<center>'''R4-1'''</center>|105px]]
 
'''Option. '''The DO NOT PASS (R4-1) sign may be used in addition to pavement markings (see  [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.3|EPG 620.2.3]]) to emphasize the restriction on passing. The DO NOT PASS sign may be used at one-lane bridges and work zones. Any other use of this sign requires authorization from the Highway Safety and Traffic Division.
 
'''Support. '''Standards for determining the location and extent of no-passing zone pavement markings are set forth in  [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.3|EPG 620.2.3]].
 
'''Standard. '''PASS WITH CARE (R4-2) signs shall be used in conjunction with the DO NOT PASS sign.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.32}}903.2.32 PASS WITH CARE Sign (R4-2) (MUTCD Section 2B.37)==
 
[[File:R4-2.png|center|thumb|<center>'''R4-2'''</center>|105px]]
 
'''Guidance. '''The PASS WITH CARE (R4-2) sign should be installed at the downstream end of a no-passing zone if a DO NOT PASS sign has been installed at the upstream end of the zone.
 
'''Standard. '''The PASS WITH CARE sign shall be the same size and shall be erected in the same manner as the DO NOT PASS (R4-1) sign.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.33}}903.2.33  KEEP RIGHT EXCEPT TO PASS Sign (R4-16) and SLOWER TRAFFIC KEEP RIGHT Sign (R4-3) (MUTCD Section 2B.38)==
 
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|-
|Crossbuck  (two rectangles in an "x" configuration)|| * Highway-Rail Grade Crossing
||[[File:R4-3.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-3'''</center>|105px]]
||[[File:R4-16.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-16'''</center>|105px]]
|}
 
'''Option. '''The KEEP RIGHT EXCEPT TO PASS (R4-16) sign may be used on roadways where there are two lanes in one direction of travel to direct drivers to stay in the right-hand lane except when they are passing another vehicle.
 
'''Guidance. '''If used, the KEEP RIGHT EXCEPT TO PASS sign should be installed at or just beyond the beginning of a two-lane section of roadway and at selected locations along two-lane roadways where additional emphasis is needed.
 
'''Option. '''The SLOWER TRAFFIC KEEP RIGHT (R4-3) sign may be used on multi-lane through roadways to improve capacity or reduce unnecessary lane changing due to the presence of slower vehicles that impede the normal flow of traffic.
 
'''Standard. '''The SLOWER TRAFFIC KEEP RIGHT (R4-3) sign shall be required for climbing lanes.
 
'''Guidance. '''If used, the SLOWER TRAFFIC KEEP RIGHT sign should be installed at or just beyond the beginning of a multi-lane roadway section or at the beginning of an extra lane provided for trucks and/or other slow-moving traffic, and at selected locations where there is a tendency on the part of some road users to drive in the left-hand lane(or lanes) below the normal speed of traffic. These signs should not be used on the approach to an interchange or through an interchange area where traffic is entering or exiting, or along deceleration or acceleration lanes.
 
If an extra lane has been provided for trucks and other slow-moving traffic, a Lane Ends sign (see  [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.39|EPG 903.3.39]]) should be installed in advance of the point where the extra lane ends. Appropriate pavement markings should be installed at both the upstream and downstream ends of the extra lane (see  [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.14|EPG 620.2.14]] and [[#fig620.2.14|Figure 620.2.14]] ).
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.34}}903.2.34  Keep Right and Keep Left Signs (R4-7 Series and R4-8 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.39)==
 
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|-
|Diamond|| Warning Signs
||[[File:R4-7.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-7'''</center>|105px]]
||[[File:R4-7a.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-7a'''</center>|105px]]
||[[File:R4-7b.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-7b'''</center>|115px]]
||[[File:R4-7c.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-7c'''</center>|85px]]
|-
|-
|Rectangle (including square)||Regulatory Series **Guide Series 
||[[File:R4-8.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-8'''</center>|105px]]
Warning Series
||[[File:R4-8a.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-8a'''</center>|105px]]
||[[File:R4-8b.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-8b'''</center>|105px]]
||[[File:R4-8c.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-8c'''</center>|85px]]
|}
 
'''Option. '''The Keep Right (R4-7) sign may be used at locations where it is necessary for traffic to pass only to the right-hand side of a roadway feature or obstruction. The Keep Left (R4-8) sign may be used at locations where it is necessary for traffic to pass only to the left-hand side of a roadway feature or obstruction.
 
'''Guidance. '''At locations where it is not readily apparent that traffic is required to keep to the right, a Keep Right sign should be used.
 
'''Standard. '''If Keep Right signs are installed at the start of a median or at a median opening, they shall be placed as close as practicable to the approach ends of the medians, and shall be visible to traffic on the divided highway.
 
'''Guidance. '''If used, the Keep Right sign should be mounted on the face of or just in front of a pier or other obstruction separating opposite directions of traffic in the center of the highway such that traffic will have to pass to the right-hand side of the sign.
 
Where the approach end of the island channelizes traffic away from the approach direction, the word legend (R4-7a, R4-7b, R4-8a, or R4-8b) signs should be used instead of the symbol (R4-7 or R4-8) signs to emphasize the degree of curvature away from the approach direction (see [[#fig903.2.34.1|Figure 903.2.34.1]] ).
 
Where a two-lane, two-way highway transitions to a divided highway, the KEEP RIGHT (R4-7b) sign should be installed within 50 ft. of the gore point, if possible. The edge of the sign should be a minimum of 6 ft. from the curb or shoulder point.
 
'''Standard. '''The Keep Right (Left) sign shall not be installed on the right-hand (left-hand) side of the roadway in a position where traffic must pass to the left-hand (right-hand) side of the sign.
 
'''Option. '''The Keep Right sign may be omitted at intermediate ends of divisional islands and medians.
 
A narrow Keep Right (R4-7c) sign may be installed on the approach end of a median island that is less than 4 feet wide at the point where the sign is to be located.
 
'''Standard. '''A narrow Keep Right (R4-7c) sign shall not be installed on a median island that has a width of 4 feet or more at the point where the sign is to be located.
 
'''Option. '''The Keep Right sign may be installed in the median of a divided highway crossing that functions as a single intersection such that it is visible to traffic on the divided highway as shown in [[#fig903.2.41.3|Figure 903.2.41.3]]  and [[#fig903.2.41.4|Figure 903.2.41.4]] .
 
'''Support. '''[[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.40|EPG 903.2.40]] provides more information about the use of the Keep Right sign in combination with or in lieu of ONE-WAY signs at divided highway crossings.
 
'''Standard. '''The KEEP RIGHT (R4-7b) sign shall be installed as close to the median nose as possible where an undivided highway transitions into a divided highway.
 
{{SpanID|fig903.2.34.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.34.1 Examples of Keep Right and Keep Left Sign Placement (Sheet 1 of 2).jpg|center|800px|alt=The first example shows a two-lane vertical roadway on the left of a two-lane horizontal roadway. Both lanes of the horizontal roadway are traveling eastbound. Posted on a triangular median island, which separates the southbound lane from the northbound lane, an R4-7a sign is shown facing south toward northbound traffic merging east onto the horizontal roadway.
 
The second example shows a two-lane vertical roadway intersecting a three-lane horizontal roadway. All lanes of the horizontal roadway are traveling eastbound. Posted on a triangular median island, an R4-7a sign is shown facing south toward northbound traffic merging east onto the horizontal roadway.
 
The third example shows a two-lane vertical roadway curving to the east into a one-lane ramp. Posted on a triangular median island, an R4-7a sign is shown facing south toward northbound traffic merging onto the curved ramp.|thumb|'''Figure 903.2.34.1 '''Examples of Keep Right and Keep Left Sign Placement ''(Sheet 1 of 2)'']]
 
{{SpanID|fig903.2.34.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.34.2 Examples of Keep Right and Keep Left Sign Placement (Sheet 2 of 2).jpg|center|800px|alt=The first example shows a three-lane vertical roadway intersecting a two-lane horizontal roadway. Both directions of the vertical roadway are separated by a narrow median island. Posted on the median island, an R4-7 sign is shown facing north toward the horizontal roadway, indicating vehicles must keep right when traveling on the south receiving leg of the intersection.
 
The second example shows a four-lane vertical roadway, two lanes in each direction, separated by a yellow painted median. The median transitions into a wider raised median that tapers outward as it continues north. Posted at the start of the wider median, an R4-7b sign is shown facing south toward northbound traffic, indicating vehicles must keep right.|thumb|'''Figure 903.2.34.2 '''Examples of Keep Right and Keep Left Sign Placement ''(Sheet 2 of 2)'']]
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.35}}903.2.35 DO NOT DRIVE ON SHOULDER Sign (R4-17) (MUTCD Section 2B.43)==
 
[[image:R4-17.jpg|center|thumb|<center>'''R4-17'''</center>|105px]]
 
'''Option. '''The DO NOT DRIVE ON SHOULDER (R4-17) sign may be installed to inform road users that using the shoulder of a roadway as a travel lane is prohibited.
 
'''Guidance. '''The DO NOT DRIVE ON SHOULDER (R4-17) sign should be considered for special conditions if there is a need determined by district traffic engineering staff. The sign should be considered as a temporary tool to aid in the enforcement of the condition. After it appears the problem has been corrected, these signs should be removed.
 
'''Support. '''The R4-17 sign is to be used only where necessary. MoDOT does not want to set driver expectations for general use of this sign.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.36}}903.2.36  Selective Exclusion Signs and Plaques (MUTCD Section 2B.45)==
 
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|-
|colspan="2"|* This sign shall be exclusively the shape shown.
||[[image:R5-2.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R5-2'''</center>|105px]]
||[[image:R5-2aP.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R5-2aP'''</center>|105px]]
||[[image:R5-25.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R5-25'''</center>|105px]]
||[[image:R5-29.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R5-29'''</center>|105px]]
|}
 
'''Option. '''Selective Exclusion signs may be used to provide notice to road users that State or local statutes or ordinances exclude designated types of traffic from using particular roadways or facilities.
 
'''Standard. '''Selective Exclusion signs shall clearly indicate the type of traffic that is excluded.
 
'''Support. '''Typical exclusion messages include:
::A. No Trucks (R5-2),
::B. No Pedestrian Crossing (R9-3),
::C. EXCEPT LOCAL DELIVERY (R5-2aP) plaque.
::D. NO VENDING (R5-24)
::E. NO FISHING FROM BRIDGE (R5-25)
::F. AUTHORIZED AND EMERGENCY VEHICLES ONLY (R5-29)
 
'''Guidance. '''If an exclusion is governed by vehicle weight, a Weight Limit sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.53|EPG 903.2.53]]) should be used instead of a Selective Exclusion sign.
 
The Selective Exclusion sign should be placed on the right-hand side of the roadway at an appropriate distance from the intersection so as to be clearly visible to all road users turning into the roadway that has the exclusion. The No Pedestrian Crossing (R9-3) sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.46|EPG 903.2.46]]) should be installed so as to be clearly visible to pedestrians who are at a location where an alternative route is available.
 
'''Option. '''The No Pedestrian Crossing (R9-3) sign may also be used at underpasses or elsewhere where pedestrian facilities are not provided.
 
The EXCEPT LOCAL DELIVERY (R5-2aP) plaque may be mounted below the R5-2 sign.
 
The NO VENDING (R5-24) sign may be used at locations where vending is taking place within the right-of-way.
 
'''Standard. '''When used, the NO FISHING FROM BRIDGE (R5-25) sign shall be mounted at or near the bridge ends.
 
'''Option. '''The NO FISHING FROM BRIDGE (R5-25) sign may be used at locations where fishing from a bridge creates a safety hazard.
 
'''Guidance. '''The AUTHORIZED AND EMERGENCY VEHICLES ONLY (R5-29) sign should be used at emergency crossovers to prohibit vehicles from using the emergency crossover unless they have special permission (such as law enforcement vehicles or emergency vehicles) or are performing official business (such as highway agency vehicles).
 
The No U Turn sign should be installed above the AUTHORIZED AND EMERGENCY VEHICLES ONLY sign.
 
Signing for both directions of traffic should be provided on one post with the signs being installed 90 degrees to the roadway. The signs should be mounted back to back. The post should be located approximately in the middle of the median. If median width is greater than 60 ft., consideration should be given to install separate signs.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.37}}903.2.37  DO NOT ENTER Sign (R5-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.46)==
 
[[image:R5-1.gif|thumb|center|<center>'''R5-1'''</center>|105px]]
 
'''Standard. '''The DO NOT ENTER (R5-1) sign shall be used at the following locations:
::A. Where a two-way roadway becomes a one-way roadway;
::B. The intersection of an interchange exit ramp with a crossroad as specified in [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.39|EPG 903.2.39]] (see [[#fig903.2.39.1|Figure 903.2.39.1]]);
::C. The intersection of a channelized or turning roadway with a two-way undivided crossroad; and
::D. Except as provided in the fourth paragraph of this article, an intersection with a divided highway (see [[#fig903.2.37|Figure 903.2.37]]).
 
If the DO NOT ENTER sign is mounted behind a STOP or YIELD sign:
::A. 36 x 36 inch DO NOT ENTER sign shall be used behind a 48 x 48 inch STOP sign; and
::B. 30 x 30 inch. DO NOT ENTER sign shall be used behind a 60 x 60 inch YIELD sign.
 
'''Guidance. '''A DO NOT ENTER sign should be installed at other locations where additional emphasis is needed where wrong-way movements are prominent or where the intersecting angle of roadways is such that the visibility of ONE WAY signs alone does not sufficiently convey the restriction.
 
'''Option. '''A DO NOT ENTER sign may be omitted on a low-speed urban street that is a divided highway at a crossing that functions as two separate intersections.
 
'''Guidance. '''The DO NOT ENTER sign, if used, should be placed directly in view of a road user at the point where a road user could wrongly enter a divided highway, one-way roadway, or ramp. The sign should be mounted facing traffic that might enter the roadway or ramp in the wrong direction.
 
At a crossing with a divided highway; the sign, if used, should be placed on the outside edge side of the roadway facing traffic that might enter the roadway in the wrong direction.
 
If the DO NOT ENTER sign would be visible to traffic to which it does not apply, the sign should be turned away from, or shielded from, the view of that traffic.
 
A second DO NOT ENTER sign should be used, particularly where traffic approaches from an intersecting roadway ([[#fig903.2.37|Figure 903.2.37]]).
 
[[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]] contains the provisions for the use of continuously-operated or actuated LEDs to enhance the conspicuity of signs.
 
{{SpanID|fig903.2.37}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.37 Locations of DO NOT ENTER and WRONG WAY Signing for Divided Highway Crossings that Function as Two Separate Intersections.jpg|thumb|800px|alt=A vertical two-lane roadway intersects a horizontal divided highway with two eastbound lanes, a median, and two westbound lanes. Each direction of the horizontal highway has a left-turn lane at its intersection with the vertical roadway.
Along the eastbound lanes, a required R5-1 “DO NOT ENTER” sign is posted on the median to the left of the left-turn lane, facing westbound traffic. A second R5-1 sign is posted to the right of the eastbound right lane at the intersection, also facing westbound traffic. Farther west along the eastbound lanes, two R5-1a “WRONG WAY” signs are installed outside of the travel lanes, one on each side of the roadway, both facing westbound traffic.
Along the westbound lanes, a required R5-1 “DO NOT ENTER” sign is posted on the median to the left of the left-turn lane, facing eastbound traffic. A second R5-1 sign is posted to the right of the westbound right lane at the intersection, also facing eastbound traffic. Farther east along the westbound lanes, two R5-1a “WRONG WAY” signs are installed outside of the travel lanes, one on each side of the roadway, both facing eastbound traffic.
Spacing guidance is shown: the R5-1 signs are placed 50 to 80 feet from the intersection, while the R5-1a signs are placed 200 to 250 feet from the R5-1 signs.|center|'''Figure 903.2.37 '''Locations of DO NOT ENTER and WRONG WAY Signing for Divided Highway Crossings that Function as Two Separate Intersections]]
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.38}}903.2.38  WRONG WAY Sign (R5-1a) (MUTCD Section 2B.47)==
 
[[image:R5-1a.gif|thumb|center|<center>'''R5-1a'''</center>|105px]]
 
'''Option. '''The WRONG WAY (R5-1a) sign may be used as a supplement to the DO NOT ENTER sign where a crossroad intersects a one-way roadway in a manner that does not physically discourage or prevent wrong-way entry (see [[#fig903.2.37|Figure 903.2.37]]).
 
'''Guidance. '''If used, the WRONG WAY sign should be placed at a location along the one-way roadway farther from the crossroad than the DO NOT ENTER sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.37|EPG 903.2.37]]).
 
The WRONG WAY sign should be placed on the same side of the road as the DO NOT ENTER sign.
 
'''Support. '''[[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]] contains the provisions for the use of continuously-operated or actuated LEDs to enhance the conspicuity of signs.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.39}}903.2.39  Wrong-Way Traffic Control at Interchange Ramps (MUTCD Section 2B.48)==
 
'''Standard. '''At interchange exit ramp terminals where the ramp intersects a crossroad in such a manner that wrong-way entry could inadvertently be made, the following signs shall be used (see [[#fig903.2.39.1|Figure 903.2.39.1]]):
::A. At least one ONE WAY sign for each direction of travel on the crossroad shall be placed where the exit ramp intersects the crossroad.
::B. At least one DO NOT ENTER sign shall be conspicuously placed near the downstream end of the exit ramp in positions appropriate for full view of a road user starting to enter wrongly from the crossroad.
::C. At least one WRONG WAY sign shall be placed on the exit ramp facing a road user traveling in the wrong direction.
 
'''Guidance. '''In addition, the following pavement markings should be used (see [[#fig903.2.39.1|Figure 903.2.39.1]]):
::A. On two-lane paved crossroads at interchanges, solid double yellow lines should be used as a center line for an adequate distance on both sides approaching the ramp intersections.
::B. Where crossroad channelization or ramp geometrics do not make wrong-way movements difficult, a lane-use arrow should be placed in each lane of an exit ramp near the crossroad terminal where it will be clearly visible to a potential wrong-way road user.
 
'''Option. '''The following traffic control devices may be used to supplement the signs and pavement markings described in the first and second paragraphs of this article:
::A. Additional ONE WAY signs may be placed, especially on two-lane rural crossroads, appropriately in advance of the ramp intersection to supplement the required ONE WAY sign(s).
::B. Additional WRONG WAY signs may be used.
::C. Slender, elongated wrong-way arrow pavement markings (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #fig3b21|Figure 620.2.22.1]]) intended primarily to warn wrong-way road users that they are traveling in the wrong direction may be placed upstream from the ramp terminus (see [[#fig903.2.39.1|Figure 903.2.39.1]] ) to indicate the correct direction of traffic flow. Wrong-way arrow pavement markings may also be placed on the exit ramp at appropriate locations near the crossroad junction to indicate wrong-way movement.
::D. Lane-use arrow pavement markings may be placed on the exit ramp and crossroad near their intersection to indicate the permissive direction of flow.
::E. Lane control signs or movement prohibition signs may be used on the approaches to the exit ramp.
::D. A Keep Right (R4-7 or R4-7c) may be used on a ramp median nose for wrong-way traffic control.
 
'''Guidance. '''On interchange entrance ramps where the ramp merges with the through roadway and the design of the interchange does not clearly make evident the direction of traffic on the separate roadways or ramps, a ONE WAY sign visible to traffic on the entrance ramp and through roadway should be placed on each side of the through roadway near the entrance ramp merging point.
 
'''Option. '''On interchange entrance ramps where the ramp merges with the through roadway and the design of the interchange does not clearly make evident the direction of traffic on the separate roadways or ramps a No Left Turn (R3-2) sign may be located on the left-hand side of the entrance ramp at the gore. If a No Left Turn (R3-2) sign is located on the left-hand side, a supplemental R3-2 sign may be installed on the right-hand side of the entrance ramp.
 
On interchange entrance ramps where the ramp merges with the through roadway and the design clearly indicates the direction of flow, a ONE WAY sign may be placed visible to traffic on the entrance ramp and/or a NO TURNS (R3-3) sign may be placed visible to traffic on the entrance ramp and through roadway at the gore area.
 
'''Support. '''[[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.37|EPG 903.2.37]], [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.38|EPG 903.2.38]], and [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.40|EPG 903.2.40]] contain further information on signing to avoid wrong-way movements at at-grade intersections on expressways.
 
{{SpanID|fig903.2.39.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.39.1. Example of Application of Regulatory Signing and Pavement Markings at an Exit Ramp Termination to Deter Wrong-Way Entry.jpg|800px|alt=The example shows a horizontal two-lane roadway with an entrance ramp connecting from the north and a vertical exit ramp intersecting from the south.
At the top of the figure, on the horizontal roadway, a guide sign for “I-70 East Columbia” is shown to the right of the roadway, adjacent to a R3-1 “No Right Turn” sign and two R6-1 one-way signs, all facing eastbound traffic. Further east, at the intersection, there are two additional R6-1 one-way signs, back to back—one facing eastbound traffic and the other facing westbound traffic.
At the bottom of the figure, on the vertical exit ramp, two R5-1a “WRONG WAY” signs are shown, one on each side of the roadway, both facing north. A Wrong-Way arrow is marked on the pavement between the signs. Further north, two R5-1 “DO NOT ENTER” signs are shown on both sides of the roadway, both facing north. As the exit ramp approaches the intersection, it splits into two lanes, one for right turns and one for through/left turns, separated by a triangular-shaped channelizing island.
At the intersection of the exit ramp right-turn lane, a Wrong-Way arrow is marked on the pavement. A yield line pavement marking is shown across the lane. Adjacent to this marking and on the right side of the lane, an R1-2 “Yield” sign is shown, with an optional R1-1 “Stop” sign alternative, in which case the marking should be a stop line. Immediately behind these signs, an R5-1 “DO NOT ENTER” sign is shown facing toward the northeast and the horizontal roadway.
In the through/left-turn lane of the exit ramp, an R1-1 “Stop” sign is posted on the island in front of two back-to-back R6-1 one-way signs that face both directions of the horizontal roadway.
Spacing guidance is shown: the R5-1 signs are placed 50 to 80 feet from the intersection, while the R5-1a “WRONG WAY” signs are placed 200 to 250 feet from the DO NOT ENTER sign.|thumb|center|'''Figure 903.2.39.1.''' Example of Application of Regulatory Signing and Pavement Markings at an Exit Ramp Termination to Deter Wrong-Way Entry]]
 
{{SpanID|fig903.2.39.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.39.2. Locations of Wrong-Way signing for Divided Highways with Offset Left Turn Lanes.jpg|800px|alt=The example shows a horizontal divided highway intersected by a vertical two-lane roadway. The divided highway has two eastbound lanes, a median, and two westbound lanes, each with a left-turn lane at the intersection.
Starting with the eastbound approach, two R5-1a “WRONG WAY” signs are located outside of the travel lane, one on each side of the roadway, both facing east. Just east of these, an R5-1 “DO NOT ENTER” sign is posted on the median to the left of the eastbound left-turn lane, and another R5-1 sign is posted to the right of the eastbound right lane. Additionally, a third “DO NOT ENTER” sign is placed just east of the first sign on the right.
On the westbound approach, two R5-1a “WRONG WAY” signs are located outside of the travel lane, one on each side of the roadway, both facing west. Just west of these, an R5-1 “DO NOT ENTER” sign is posted on the median to the left of the westbound left-turn lane, and another R5-1 sign is posted to the right of the westbound right lane. Additionally, a third “DO NOT ENTER” sign is placed just west of the first sign on the right.
In total, six R5-1 “DO NOT ENTER” signs and four R5-1a “WRONG WAY” signs are shown, oriented toward drivers who may mistakenly travel the wrong way.|thumb|center|'''Figure 903.2.39.2. ''' Locations of Wrong-Way signing for Divided Highways with Offset Left Turn Lanes<br/><br/>'''Notes:'''<br/>
<ol style="margin-left: 1.5em;">
<li>Distances may be adjusted up to 20’ +/- based on engineering judgement</li>
<li>4”x72” red sign post delineators are optional</li>
<li>MoDOT maintained signs shall not be installed on the back of non-MoDOT maintained signs</li>
<li>See [[#fig903.2.41.1 |Figure 903.2.41.4 ]] for ONE WAY signing for Divided Highways with Offset Left Turn Lanes</li>
</ol>
]]
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.40}}903.2.40  ONE WAY Signs (R6-1 and R6-2) (MUTCD Section 2B.49)==
 
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|-
|colspan="2"|**Guide series includes general service, specific service, recreation and emergency management signs
||[[image:R6-1.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R6-1'''</center>|170px]]
|[[image:R6-2.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R6-2'''</center>|110px]]
|}
|}


==903.1.18 Sign Colors (MUTCD Section 2A.11)==
'''Standard. '''Except as provided in the sixth paragraph of this article, the ONE WAY (R6-1 or R6-2) sign shall be used to indicate streets or roadways upon which vehicular traffic is allowed to travel in one direction only.
[[image:903.1.18.jpg|right|400px]]
 
ONE WAY signs shall be placed parallel to the one-way street at all alleys and roadways that intersect one-way roadways.
 
At the crossing of a roadway with a divided highway that functions as two separate intersections, ONE WAY signs shall be placed, visible to each crossroad approach, on the near right and far left corners of each intersection with the directional roadways (see [[#fig903.2.41.1|Figures 903.2.41.1]] and [[#fig903.2.41.2|903.2.41.2]]).
 
At the crossing of a roadway with a divided highway that functions as a single intersection Keep Right (R4-7) signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.34|EPG 903.2.34]]) and/or ONE WAY signs shall be installed (see [[#fig903.2.41.3|Figure 903.2.41.3]] and [[#fig903.2.41.4|Figure 903.2.41.4]]). If Keep Right signs are installed, they shall be placed as close as practicable to the approach ends of the medians and shall be visible to traffic on the divided highway as shown in [[#fig903.2.41.3|Figure 903.2.41.3]] and [[#fig903.2.41.4|Figure 903.2.41.4]]. If ONE WAY signs are installed, they shall be placed on the near right and far left corners of the intersection and shall be visible to each crossroad approach.
 
'''Option. '''At the crossing of a roadway with a divided highway, regardless of function as a single or separate intersections, ONE WAY signs may also be placed on the far right corner of the intersection as shown in [[#fig903.2.41.1|Figure 903.2.41.1]], [[#fig903.2.41.2|Figure 903.2.41.2]], [[#fig903.2.41.3|Figure 903.2.41.3]] and [[#fig903.2.41.4|Figure 903.2.41.4]].
 
ONE WAY signs may be omitted on the one-way roadways of divided highways, where the design of interchanges indicates the direction of traffic on the separate roadways.
 
'''Support. ''' [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.39|EPG 903.2.39]] contains information for the placement of ONE WAY signs at a crossroad with an interchange.
 
'''Standard. '''If used at unsignalized intersections with one-way streets, ONE WAY signs shall be placed on the near right and the far left corners of the intersection facing traffic entering or crossing the one-way street.
 
If used at signalized intersections with one-way streets, ONE WAY signs shall be placed near the appropriate signal faces, on the poles holding the traffic signals, on the mast arm or span wire holding the signals, or at the locations specified for unsignalized intersections.
 
At unsignalized T-intersections where the roadway at the top of the T-intersection is a one-way roadway, ONE WAY signs shall be placed on the near-right and the far side of the intersection facing traffic on the stem approach.
 
ONE WAY (R6-2) signs may be used in lieu of ONE WAY (R6-1) signs on mast arms for signals or where lateral space is limited.
 
Where the central island of a roundabout allows for the installation of signs, ONE WAY signs may be used to direct traffic counter-clockwise around the central island (see [[#fig903.2.40.2|Figure 903.2.40.2]] and [[#fig903.2.40.3|Figure 903.2.40.3]]).
 
'''Guidance. '''Where used on the central island of a roundabout, the mounting height of a ONE WAY sign should be at least 4 feet, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way.


'''Standard.'''  The colors to be used on standard signs and their specific use on these signs shall be as indicated in this article. The color coordinates and values shall be as described in Tables 903.1.18.1 and 903.1.18.2, [[MoDOT Sign Detail Manual]] and in 23 CFR, Part 655, Subpart F, Appendix.
{{SpanID|fig903.2.40.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.40.1 Example of Regulatory and Warning Signs for a Mini-Roundabout.png|center|thumb|alt=A central island surrounded by a circular roadway is shown with four roadways that enter from the north, south, east, and west.
On the roadway entering the circular roadway from the south, a sign assembly composed of a W2-6 sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque is shown to the right of the roadway facing south. Farther north, a W11-2 sign mounted above a W16-7P plaque is shown to the right of the roadway facing south in advance of a crosswalk. Just beyond this crosswalk, an R1-2 “YIELD” sign is shown on the right side of the roadway facing south, at the entrance to the mini-roundabout.
On the opposite side of the road, before the same crosswalk, a W11-2 sign mounted above a W16-7P plaque is shown facing north.|800px|'''Figure 903.2.40.1''' Example of Regulatory and Warning Signs for a Mini-Roundabout]]


'''Support.'''  As a quick reference, common uses of sign colors are shown in Tables 903.1.18.1 and 903.1.18.2.  Color schemes on specific signs are shown in the illustrations located in each appropriate section.
{{SpanID|fig903.2.40.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.40.2 Example of Regulatory and Warning Signs for a One-Lane Roundabout.png|center|thumb|alt=A central island surrounded by a circular roadway is shown with four roadways that enter from the north, south, east, and west.
On the roadway entering the circular roadway from the south, a sign assembly composed of a W2-6 sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque is shown to the right of the roadway facing south. Farther north, a W11-2 sign mounted above a W16-7P plaque is shown to the right of the roadway facing south in advance of a crosswalk. Just beyond this crosswalk, an R1-2 “YIELD” sign is shown on the right side of the roadway facing south as it enters the one-lane roundabout.
Within the central island of the roundabout, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign is shown facing south. In the median of the north approach, prior to entering the roundabout, an R1-2 “YIELD” sign is shown facing south.
On the opposite side of the south approach (before the same crosswalk), a W11-2 sign mounted above a W16-7P plaque is shown facing north.|800px|'''Figure 903.2.40.2''' Example of Regulatory and Warning Signs for a One-Lane Roundabout]]


Whenever white is specified herein as a color, it is understood to include [http://www.trafficsign.us/reflidguide.pdf silver-colored retroreflective] coatings or elements that reflect white light. The colors coral, purple and light blue are being reserved for uses that will be determined in the future by the FHWA. Information regarding color coding of destinations on guide signs is contained in [[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.2 Color, Retroreflection and Illumination (MUTCD Section 2D.03)|EPG 903.7.2 Color, Retroreflection and Illumination]].
{{SpanID|fig903.2.40.3}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.40.3 Example of a Regulatory and Warning Signs for a Two-Lane Roundabout with Consecutive Double lefts.png|center|thumb|alt=A central island surrounded by a circular roadway is shown with four roadways that enter from the north, south, east, and west.
On the roadway entering the circular roadway from the south, a sign assembly composed of a W2-6 sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque is shown to the right of the roadway facing south. Farther north, a W11-2 sign mounted above a W16-7P plaque is shown to the right of the roadway facing south in advance of a crosswalk. Just beyond this crosswalk, an R1-2 “YIELD” sign is shown on the right side of the roadway facing south as it enters the one-lane roundabout.
Within the central island of the roundabout, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign is shown facing south. In the median of the northbound approach, prior to entering the roundabout, an R1-2 “YIELD” sign is shown facing south. Additionally, in this same median, two sign assemblies composed of a W2-6 sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque are shown: one placed before the crosswalk facing south, and another placed just beyond the crosswalk facing north.
On the opposite side of the north approach (before the same crosswalk), a W11-2 sign mounted above a W16-7P plaque is shown facing north.|800px|'''Figure 903.2.40.3''' Example of a Regulatory and Warning Signs for a Two-Lane Roundabout with Consecutive Double lefts]]


=={{SpanID|903.2.41}}903.2.41  Divided Highway Crossing Signs (R6-3 and R6-3a) (MUTCD Section 2B.50)==


====<center>''Table 903.1.18.1 Common Uses of Sign Legend Colors''</center>====
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|+
!style="background:#BEBEBE" rowspan ="2"|Type of Sign
!style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan="5"|Legend
|-
|-
!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Black!! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Green!!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Red !!style="background:#BEBEBE"|White!!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Yellow
||[[image:R6-3.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R6-3'''</center>|150px]]
|[[image:R6-3a.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R6-3a'''</center>|150px]]
|}
 
'''Standard. '''On unsignalized minor-street approaches from which both left turns and right turns are permitted onto a divided highway at a crossing that functions as two separate intersections (see  [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.23|EPG 903.1.23]]), a Divided Highway Crossing (R6-3 or R6-3a) sign shall be used to advise road users that they are approaching an intersection with a divided highway (see [[#fig903.2.41.1|Figure 903.2.41.1]] and [[#fig903.2.41.2|Figure 903.2.41.2]]).
 
If a Divided Highway Crossing sign is used at a four-leg intersection, the R6-3 sign shall be used. If used at a T-intersection, the R6-3a sign shall be used.
 
The Divided Highway Crossing sign shall be located on the near right corner of the intersection, mounted beneath a STOP or YIELD sign or on a separate support.
 
The DIVIDED HIGHWAY (R6-3b) sign may be used in situations where the R6-3 or R6-3a Divided Highway Crossing signs may be confusing.
 
{{SpanID|fig903.2.41.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.41.1 ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Median Widths Greater than 150 Feet.png|center|thumb|alt=The example shows a horizontal divided highway intersected by a vertical two-lane roadway. The divided highway has two lanes to the east, a wide median greater than 150 feet, and two lanes to the west, each with a left-turn lane at the intersection.
On the vertical roadway, northbound approach, on the right just before the intersection with the east lanes there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign and an R6-3 “Divided Highway” sign, all facing south. Behind these signs, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing north. Just past the intersection with the east lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign on the right corner facing south.
Further north, at the intersection with the west lanes, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign faces south. Behind this sign, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing north. Just past the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign on the right corner facing south.
On the vertical roadway, southbound approach, the signing is mirrored. On the right just before the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign and an R6-3 “Divided Highway” sign, all facing north. Behind these signs, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing south. Just past the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign on the right corner facing north.
Further south, at the intersection with the east lanes, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign faces north. Behind this sign, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing south. Just past the intersection with the east lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign on the right corner facing north.|800px|'''Figure 903.2.41.1''' ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Median Widths Greater than 150 Feet]]
 
{{SpanID|fig903.2.41.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.41.2 ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Median Widths of 60 Feet to 150 Feet.png|center|thumb|alt=The example shows a horizontal divided highway intersected by a vertical two-lane roadway. The divided highway has two lanes to the east, a median width between 60 and 150 feet, and two lanes to the west, each with a left-turn lane at the intersection.
On the vertical roadway, northbound approach, on the right just before the intersection with the east lanes there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign and an R6-3 “Divided Highway” sign, all facing south. Behind these signs, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing north. Just past the intersection with the east lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign on the right side of the roadway facing south.
Further north, at the intersection with the west lanes, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with either an R1-1 “STOP” sign or an R1-2 “YIELD” sign faces south. Behind this sign, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing north. Just past the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign on the right corner facing south.
On the vertical roadway, southbound approach, the signing is mirrored. On the right just before the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign and an R6-3 “Divided Highway” sign, all facing north. Behind these signs, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing south. Just past the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign on the right side of the roadway facing north.
Further south, at the intersection with the east lanes, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with either an R1-1 “STOP” sign or an R1-2 “YIELD” sign faces north. Behind this sign, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing south. Just past the intersection with the east lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign on the right corner facing north.|800px|'''Figure 903.2.41.2''' ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Median Widths of 60 Feet to 150 Feet]]
 
{{SpanID|fig903.2.41.3}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.41.3 ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Median Widths Narrower Than 60 Feet.png|center|thumb|alt=A vertical two-lane roadway intersects a horizontal highway with two lanes to the east, a median narrower than 60 feet, and two lanes to the west. Each direction of the horizontal highway has a left-turn lane at its intersection with the vertical roadway.
On the vertical roadway, northbound approach, on the right just before the intersection with the east lanes there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign and an R6-3 “Divided Highway” sign, all facing south. Behind these signs, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing north. Just past the intersection with the east lanes, there is an R4-7 “KEEP RIGHT” sign posted on the median facing west.
Further north, past the intersection with the west lanes, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign faces south (optional).
On the vertical roadway, southbound approach, the signing is mirrored. On the right just before the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign and an R6-3 “Divided Highway” sign, all facing north. Behind these signs, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing south. Just past the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R4-7 “KEEP RIGHT” sign posted on the median facing east.
Further south, past the intersection with the east lanes, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign faces north (optional).|800px|'''Figure 903.2.41.3''' ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Median Widths Narrower Than 60 Feet]]
 
{{SpanID|fig903.2.41.4}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.41.4 ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Offset Left Turn Lanes.png|center|thumb|alt=A vertical two-lane roadway intersects a horizontal highway with two lanes to the east, a median, and two lanes to the west. Each direction of the horizontal highway has a left-turn lane at its intersection with the vertical roadway, and the left-turn lanes are offset across the median.
On the vertical roadway, north approach, on the right just before the intersection with the east lanes there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign and an R6-3 “Divided Highway” sign, all facing south. Behind these signs, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing north. Just past the intersection with the east lanes, there is an R4-7 “KEEP RIGHT” sign posted on the median facing west.
Further north, past the intersection with the west lanes, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign faces south (optional).
On the vertical roadway, south approach, the signing is mirrored. On the right just before the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign and an R6-3 “Divided Highway” sign, all facing north. Behind these signs, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing south. Just past the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R4-7 “KEEP RIGHT” sign posted on the median facing east.
Further south, past the intersection with the east lanes, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign faces north (optional).|800px|'''Figure 903.2.41.4''' ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Offset Left Turn Lanes]]
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.42}}903.2.42  Parking, Standing, and Stopping Signs (R7 and R8 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.52)==
 
'''Support. '''Parking signs pertain to the parking, standing, and stopping of vehicles along the roadway and in designated parking areas. They cover a wide variety of regulations, and only general guidance can be provided here. The word “standing” when used on the R7 and R8 series of signs refers to the practice of a driver keeping the vehicle in a stationary position while continuing to occupy the vehicle. The word “stopping” when used on the R7 and R8 series signs refers to any vehicle, occupied by a driver or not, that stops other than to avoid conflict with other traffic or to comply with official direction. Other types of activities such as active loading, active passenger loading, and/or waiting might be established in State or local codes for use on R7 and R8 series signs.
 
Parking signs are categorized as either (1) prohibiting parking or (2) permitting parking with restrictions on how parking is allowed.
 
The types of parking, standing, or stopping prohibitions that might be encountered include, but are not limited to:
::A. Prohibited at all times;
::B. Prohibited only at certain times of the day and/or days of the week;
::C. Prohibited with exceptions, such as for bus stops, loading/unloading zones, persons with disabilities, or electric vehicle charging stations; or
::D. Prohibited under certain conditions, such as Snow Emergency Routes.
 
Permissive parking signs allowing parking with restrictions include, but are not limited to:
::A. Parking only allowed for limited time duration (such as 30 minutes or for 1 hour);
::B.  Metered parking requiring payment at an individual or a multi-space parking meter, or through electronic means such as by telephone or mobile application.;
::C. Parking only for specific persons (such as those with disabilities or patrons or employees of a business) or specific vehicle types (such as electric vehicles, police/government vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles, or taxis);
::D. Angled or back-in angled parking when it is not commonly used in the area;
::E. Parking programs such as neighborhood/residential permits, school areas, or special events; and
::F. Emergency parking or stopping only.
 
The District Engineer is authorized to act on requests for parking restrictions within incorporated areas upon receipt of a city ordinance requesting the same.
 
'''Option. '''The District Engineer may authorize parking restrictions after completion of a study by the district staff and review by county and local law enforcement.
 
Within interchange areas and on ramps the standard NO PARKING ANYTIME (R7-1) sign may be used.
 
'''Guidance. '''Local law enforcement agencies should be consulted when determining if there is a need for no parking signs to be installed.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.43}}903.2.43  Design of Parking, Standing, and Stopping Signs (MUTCD Section 2B.53)==
<center>
{| style="text-align: center;"
|-
|-
|Regulatory||X||-||X||X||-
| [[File:R7-1.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-1 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-108.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-108 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-111.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-111 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-111a.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-111a '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-112.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-112 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-112a.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-112a '''</center>]]
|-
|-
|align="center"|Prohibitive||-||-||X||X||-
| [[File:R7-112b.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-112b '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-113.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-113 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-113aP.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-113aP '''</center>]][[File:R7-113bP.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-113bP '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-114a.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-114a '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-114b.jpg|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-114b '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-201P.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-201P '''</center>]]
|-
|-
|align="center"|Permissive||-||X||-||-||-
| [[File:R7-202P.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-202P '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-5.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-5 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-8.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-8 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-8aP.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-8aP '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-35.png|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-35 '''</center>]]
 
|}
</center>
'''Standard. '''Parking, standing, or stopping signs shall be rectangular.
 
Public agencies shall follow established law (State law, local ordinance, or regulation) as adopted by the authorized agency regarding what messages are allowed on parking signs.
 
The legend on parking signs shall state applicable regulations. Parking signs shall comply with the standards of shape, color, and location.
 
Prohibitive parking signs shall be used where parking is prohibited at all times or at specific times. Except as otherwise provided in this article, parking signs shall have a red legend and border on a white background and, when the parking prohibition symbol is used, the symbol “P” shall be black.
 
Permissive parking signs shall be used where only time-limited parking or parking in a particular manner is allowed. Permissive parking signs shall have a green legend and border on a white background.
 
'''Guidance. '''Parking information, should be displayed from top to bottom of the sign, as applicable, in the following order:
::A. The restriction or prohibition;
::B. The times of the day that it is applicable, if not all hours;
::C. The days of the week that it is applicable, if not every day;
::D. Qualifying or supplementary information;
::E. Exemptions to the restriction of prohibition; and
::F. Any tow-away message or symbol.
 
If the parking regulation applies to a limited area or zone, the limits of the regulation should be shown by arrows or supplemental plaques. If arrows are used and if the sign is at the end of a parking zone, there should be a single-headed arrow pointing in the direction that the regulation is in effect. If the sign is at an intermediate point in a zone, there should be a double-headed arrow pointing both ways. When a single sign is used at the transition point between two parking zones, it should display a right arrow and a left arrow pointing in the direction that the respective regulations apply.
 
'''Standard. '''The times and days for which the parking regulations are in effect shall be posted if they are not in effect at all times of day or all days of the week.
 
'''Option. '''As an alternate to the use of arrows to show designated restriction zones, the following word messages may be used: BEGIN, END, HERE TO CORNER, HERE TO ALLEY, and THIS SIDE OF SIGN.
 
'''Standard. '''Where parking spaces are reserved for persons with disabilities, the Accessible Parking (R7-8) sign shall be used to designate the space and shall display the official International Symbol of Accessibility.
 
Where parking spaces that are reserved for persons with disabilities are designed to accommodate wheelchair vans, a VAN ACCESSIBLE (R7-8aP) plaque shall be mounted below the R7-8 sign.
 
The RESERVED PARKING for Persons with Disabilities (R7-8) sign shall be installed in rest area parking lots 10 ft. to 16 ft. from the edge of the handicap ramp.
 
'''Support. '''The R7-8L has a left arrow and the R7-8R a right arrow. The R7-8 does not have an arrow.
 
'''Guidance. '''Where parking spaces are designated for parking of electric vehicles, an Electric Vehicle Parking (R7-111 series, R7-112 series, and R7-113) sign should be installed adjacent to the designated spaces. Where there is no time limit, the R7-111 series sign should be used. Where parking is subject to a time limit, the R7-112 series sign should be used.
 
Where parking spaces are only designated for charging of electric vehicles, an R7-113 sign or R7-114 series sign should be installed adjacent to the designated spaces.
 
Where additional restrictions apply while a vehicle occupies the designated space, the R7-113P series plaques should be installed below the R7-113 sign or the R7-114 series signs.
 
'''Option. '''A Tow-Away Zone (R7-201P or R7-201aP) plaque may be mounted below any parking prohibition sign. The word legend TOW-AWAY ZONE may be incorporated into the parking prohibition sign in lieu of using a separate plaque.
 
The R7-201P plaque may have a black or red symbol and border on a white background.
 
'''Guidance. '''When a legend other than that on the standard parking signs is necessary, letter height, symbol size, and basic sign layout should be consistent with the those shown on the standard parking signs as detailed in the FHWA “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see  [[911 General (MUTCD Part 1) #911.1.5|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]). '''
 
In general, the letter height of the principal legend on parking signs sized for urbanized applications should be at least 2 inches.
 
The NO PARKING ON BRIDGE sign (R7-35) should be used at bridge ends or on bridges where motorists tend to block or endanger through traffic by parking on the bridge.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.44}}903.2.44  Placement of Parking, Standing, and Stopping Signs (MUTCD Section 2B.54)==
 
'''Support. '''The efficacy of parking, standing, and stopping signs, when used on conventional roads in urbanized or developed environments, depends on their visibility and consistent placement along a street or within a particular block. It is often impracticable for the entire legend to be legible from similar distances as for other types of signs. Therefore, it is important that their conventional form be recognizable from an adequate distance such that the road user can obtain the information upon closer inspection.
 
'''Guidance. '''When signs with arrows are used to indicate the extent of the restricted zones, the signs should be set at an angle of not less than 30 degrees nor more than 45 degrees with the line of traffic flow in order to be visible to approaching traffic.
 
When signs are placed at the head of perpendicular parking stalls, the signs should be parallel to the roadway facing the parking stall.
 
Spacing of signs should be based on legibility, conspicuity, and sign orientation.
 
If the zone is long, signs should be used at intermediate points within the zone.
 
If the signs are mounted at an angle of 90 degrees to the curb line, two signs should  be mounted back to back at the transition point between two parking zones, each with an appended THIS SIDE OF SIGN (R7-202P) supplemental plaque.
 
If the signs are mounted at an angle of 90 degrees to the curb line, signs without any arrows or appended plaques should be used at intermediate points within a parking zone, facing in the direction of approaching traffic. Otherwise, the standards of placement should be the same as for signs using directional arrows.
 
'''Option. '''Blanket parking regulations that apply to an entire jurisdiction may, if legal, be posted in the vicinity of the jurisdictional boundary lines. Blanket parking regulations that apply to a posted zone or district may, if legal, be posted at the entry points to the zone or district.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.45}}903.2.45 Emergency Restriction Signs (R8-7) (MUTCD Section 2B.55)==
 
[[image:R8-7.gif|center|150px|thumb|<center>'''R8-7'''</center>]]
 
'''Standard. '''Emergency Restriction signs shall be rectangular and shall have a black legend and border on a white background.
 
'''Option. '''The EMERGENCY STOPPING ONLY (R8-7) sign  may be used to discourage or prohibit shoulder parking on the interstate and other freeway highway systems based on the Missouri Revised Statutes, Section 304.024.
 
'''Guidance. '''The use of the EMERGENCY STOPPING ONLY sign should be held to a minimum and not erected unless there is a specific problem.
 
'''Support. ''' [[913.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 8B) #913.2.7|EPG 913.2.7]] contains information for the use of the DO NOT STOP ON TRACKS (R8-8) sign to discourage or prohibit parking or stopping on railroad or light rail transit tracks.
 
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.46}}903.2.46  Pedestrian Crossing Signs (R9-3) (MUTCD Section 2B.57)==
<center>
{|
|-
|-
|Warning||X||-||-||-||-
| [[File:R9-3.jpg|thumb|center|<center>'''R9-3'''</center>|120px]]
| [[File:R9-3a.jpg|thumb|center|<center>'''R9-3a'''</center>|120px]]
|}</center>
 
'''Option. '''Pedestrian Crossing signs may be used to limit pedestrian crossing to specific locations.
 
'''Standard. '''If used, Pedestrian Crossing signs shall be installed to face pedestrian approaches.
 
'''Option. '''The No Pedestrian Crossing (R9-3) sign may be used to prohibit pedestrians from crossing a roadway at an undesirable location or in front of a school or other public building where a crossing is not designated.
 
The NO PEDESTRIAN CROSSING (R9-3a) word message sign may be used as an alternate to the R9-3 symbol sign.
 
'''Support. '''Pedestrians with vision disabilities might need features other than traffic control devices to provide effective communication of the prohibition of pedestrian crossing.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.47}}903.2.47  Traffic Signal Pedestrian and Bicyclist Actuation Signs (R10-3b, R10-3d, R10-3e, R10-4, and R10-25) (MUTCD Section 2B.58)==
 
<center>
{|
|-
|-
|align="center"|Pedestrian||X||-||-||-||-
| [[File:R10-3b.jpg|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-3b'''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-3d.jpg|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-3d'''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-3e.jpg|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-3e'''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-4.jpg|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-4'''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-25.jpg|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-25'''</center>]]
|-
|-
|align="center"|Bicycle||X||-||-||-||-
|}
</center>
 
'''Standard. '''Where manual actuation of a traffic signal is required for pedestrians or bicyclists to call a signal phase to cross the roadway, traffic signal signs applicable to pedestrian actuation or bicyclist actuation shall be mounted immediately above or incorporated into the push button detector units (see [[902.9 Pedestrian Control Features (MUTCD Chapter 4I) #902.9.5|EPG 902.9.5]]). '''
 
'''Support. '''Traffic signal signs applicable to pedestrians include:
::A. Push Button for Walk Signal (R10-3 series), and
::B. Push Button for Green Signal (R10-4 series).
 
'''Option. '''If the signalized intersection has push buttons but no pedestrian heads the PUSH BUTTON FOR GREEN SIGNAL (R10-4) sign may be used instead of the R10-3e and R10-3j signs.
 
'''Guidance. '''The finger in the push button symbol on the R10-4 sign should point in the same direction as the arrow on the sign.
 
'''Option. '''Where symbolic pedestrian signal indications are used, an educational sign (R10-3b) may be used at signalized intersections. The R10-3d educational sign may be used to inform pedestrians that the pedestrian clearance time is sufficient only for the pedestrian to cross to the median at locations where pedestrians cross in two stages using a median refuge island. The R10-3e educational sign may be used where countdown pedestrian signals have been provided.
 
The R10-3e sign shall be used with pre-timed pedestrian signals. For actuated pedestrian signal, the R10-3eL and R10-3eR shall be mounted immediately above or incorporated in pedestrian pushbutton units.
 
The R10-25 sign may be used where a push button detector has been installed for pedestrians to activate In-Roadway Warning Lights (see [[902.20 In-Roadway Warning Lights (MUTCD Chapter 4U) #902.20|EPG 902.20]]) or flashing beacons that have been added to the pedestrian warning signs.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.48}}903.2.48  Traffic Signal Signs and Plaques (R10-5 through R10-23a) (MUTCD Section 2B.59)==
<center>
{|
|-
|-
|Guide||-||-||-||X||-
| [[File:R10-5.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-5 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-6.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-6 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-7.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-7 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-10.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-10 '''</center>]]
|-
|-
|align="center"|Interstate Route||-||-||-||X||-
| [[File:R10-12.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-12 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-12a.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-12a '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-13.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-13 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-14.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-14 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-14a.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-14a '''</center>]]
|-
|-
|align="center"|State Route||X||-||-||-||-
| [[File:R10-14b.jpg|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-14b '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-15.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-15 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-23.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-23 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-23a.jpg|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-23a '''</center>]]
|-
|-
|align="center"|US Route||X||-||-||-||-
|}
</center>
 
'''Option. '''To supplement traffic signal control, traffic signal (R10-5 through R10-30) signs may be used to regulate road users.
 
Traffic signal signs may be installed at certain locations to clarify signal control. Among the legends that may be used for this purpose are:
::A. LEFT (RIGHT) ON GREEN ARROW ONLY (R10-5),
::B. STOP HERE ON RED (R10-6) for observance of stop lines,
::C. DO NOT BLOCK INTERSECTION (R10-7) for avoidance of traffic obstructions,
::D. LEFT (RIGHT) TURN SIGNAL (R10-10),
::E. U TURN SIGNAL (R10-10a) for exclusive control of a U-turn movement,
::F. LEFT (RIGHT) TURN YIELD ON GREEN (symbolic circular green) (R10-12), and
::G. LEFT (RIGHT) TURN YIELD ON FLASHING YELLOW ARROW (R10-12a).
 
'''Guidance. '''If used, the LEFT ON GREEN ARROW ONLY sign, the LEFT TURN SIGNAL sign, the LEFT TURN YIELD ON GREEN (symbolic circular green) sign, or the LEFT TURN YIELD ON FLASHING YELLOW ARROW sign should be located adjacent to the left-turn signal face.
 
'''Standard. '''The LEFT TURN SIGNAL (R10-10L) sign has been discontinued by MoDOT. These signs shall remain in place until the circular red indication is replaced with a red left arrow (see [[902.6 Steady (Stop-and-Go) Operation of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4F) #902.6.6|EPG 902.6.6]] Signal Indications for Protected Only Mode Left-Turn Movements in a Separate Signal Face).
 
If an existing R10-10L is at the end of its service life, it shall be removed, and the circular red indication shall be replaced with a red left arrow.
 
'''Guidance. '''If used, the RIGHT ON GREEN ARROW ONLY sign, the RIGHT TURN SIGNAL sign, or the RIGHT TURN YIELD ON FLASHING YELLOW ARROW sign should be located adjacent to the right-turn signal face.
 
'''Option. '''If used, a U TURN SIGNAL (R10-10a) sign may be installed adjacent to the signal face that exclusively controls a U-turn movement.
 
'''Standard. '''The CROSSWALK—STOP ON RED (symbolic circular red) (R10-23) and STOP ON RED-YIELD ON FLASHING RED AFTER STOP (R10-23a) signs shall only be used in conjunction with pedestrian hybrid beacons (see [[902.10 Pedestrian Hybrid Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4J) #902.10.2|EPG 902.10.2]]).
 
The EMERGENCY SIGNAL (R10-13) sign shall be used in conjunction with emergency-vehicle traffic control signals (see [[902.13 Traffic Control Signals for Emergency-Vehicle Access (MUTCD Chapter 4M) #902.13.2|EPG 902.13.2]]).
 
The EMERGENCY SIGNAL—STOP ON FLASHING RED (R10-14 or R10-14a) sign shall be used in conjunction with emergency-vehicle hybrid beacons (see [[902.14 Hybrid Beacons for Emergency-Vehicle Access (MUTCD Chapter 4N) #902.14.2|EPG 902.14.2]]).
 
'''Option. '''If needed for extra emphasis, a STOP HERE ON FLASHING RED (R10-14b) sign may be installed with an emergency-vehicle hybrid beacon.
 
'''Standard. '''The Left Turn Yield to Bicycles (R10-12b) sign shall be limited to applications where the conflicting bicyclist movement would be unexpected in direction, location, or similar condition that would tend to violate the expectation of a turning motorist.
 
'''Guidance. '''The Left Turn Yield to Bicycles sign should be located adjacent to the left-turn signal face.
 
Currently the R10-12b sign is not used by MoDOT.  Contact the Highway Safety and Traffic division when considering the use of this sign.
 
Where conditions might warrant additional emphasis to drivers turning at a signalized intersection where potential pedestrian conflicts might not be readily apparent, a Turning Vehicles Yield to Pedestrians (R10-15) sign may be used.
 
The R10-15 series signs, where used, should be placed as follows:
::A. On the near right corner of the signalized intersection for right-turning vehicles.
::B. On the far left corner of the signalized intersection for the left-turning vehicles onto a two-way street.
::C. On the near left corner of the signalized intersection for left-turning vehicles from a one-way street onto a one-way street.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.49}}903.2.49  No Turn on Red Signs (R10-11 and R10-30a) (MUTCD Section 2B.60)==
 
<center>
{|
| [[File:R10-11.gif|thumb|center|105px|<center>'''R10-11'''</center>]]
|}
</center>
 
'''Standard. '''Where a right turn on a circular red signal indication (or a left turn on a circular red signal indication from a one-way street to a one-way street) is to be prohibited, a NO TURN ON RED (R10-11) word message sign shall be used.
 
The NO TURN ON RED (R10-11) sign shall be used to prohibit a right turn on red.
 
'''Guidance. '''If used, the No Turn on Red sign should be installed near the appropriate signal head.
 
A No Turn on Red sign should be considered when an engineering study finds that one or more of the following conditions exists:
::A. Inadequate sight distance to vehicles approaching from the left (or right, if applicable);
::B. Geometrics or operational characteristics of the intersection that might result in unexpected conflicts;
::C. An exclusive pedestrian or bicycle phase;
::D. An unacceptable number of conflicting pedestrian movements with right-turn-on-red maneuvers, especially involving children, older pedestrians, or persons with disabilities;
::E. More than three right-turn-on-red crashes reported in a 12-month period for the particular approach; or
::F. The skew angle of the intersecting roadways creates difficulty for drivers to see traffic approaching from their left (or right, if applicable).
 
'''Standard. '''If an R10-11 sign with conventional road size as shown in [[#tab903.2.3|Table 903.2.3]] is used on an approach on the far side of the intersection and the distance between the stop line and the sign is greater than 120 feet, then a duplicate sign shall be located on the near side of the intersection to supplement the sign on the far side of the intersection.
 
Except as provided by the option below, if right turn on red (RTOR) is restricted, then the NO TURN ON RED (R10-11) sign shall be used in lieu of the RIGHT TURN SIGNAL sign.
 
'''Guidance. '''If used, the NO TURN ON RED sign should mounted adjacent to the far right signal indication. Refer to [[902.6 Steady (Stop-and-Go) Operation of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4F) #902.6.13|EPG 902.6.13]] to determine when a NO TURN ON RED sign should be considered.
 
'''Option. '''Where space is limited, the square-shaped NO TURN ON RED (R10-11b) sign may be used instead of the R10-11 sign.
 
When a no-turn-on-red restriction applies during certain time periods only, the following alternatives may be used:
::A Movement Prohibition (R3-1, R3-2, R3-4, R3-18, and R3-27) signs or NO TURN ON RED signs displayed by using a blank-out sign for the time period or one or more portion(s) of a particular cycle of the traffic control signal during which the prohibition is applicable; or
 
White LEDs may be used in the border and activated during periods of turn prohibition to enhance the sign conspicuity.
 
A RIGHT TURN ON RED MUST YIELD TO U-TURN (R10-30) sign may be installed to remind road users that they must yield to conflicting U-turn traffic on the street or highway onto which they are turning right on a red signal after stopping.
 
A RIGHT TURN MUST YIELD TO U-TURN (R10-30a) sign may be installed under a yield sign to remind road users that they must yield to conflicting U-turn traffic on the street or highway on to which they are turning right controlled by a yield sign.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.50}}903.2.50  Ramp Metering Signs (R10-28 and R10-29) (MUTCD Section 2B.61)==
 
<center>
{|
| [[File:R10-28.jpg|thumb|center|95px|<center>'''R10-28'''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-29.jpg|thumb|center|125px|<center>'''R10-29'''</center>]]
|}
</center>
 
'''Option. '''When ramp control signals (see [[902.16 Traffic Control Signals for Freeway Entrance Ramps (MUTCD Chapter 4P) #902.2.16|EPG 902.16]]) are used to meter traffic on a freeway or expressway entrance ramp, regulatory signs with legends appropriate to the control may be installed adjacent to the ramp control signal faces.
 
For entrance ramps with only one controlled lane, an XX VEHICLE(S) PER GREEN (R10-28) sign may be used to inform road users of the number of vehicles that are permitted to proceed during each short display of the green signal indication. For entrance ramps with more than one controlled lane, an XX VEHICLE(S) PER GREEN EACH LANE (R10-29) sign may be used to inform road users of the number of vehicles that are permitted to proceed from each lane during each short display of the green signal indication.
 
'''Support. '''[[903.12 Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2L) #903.12|EPG 903.12]] contains provisions for the use of blank-out or changeable message signs when the metering is limited by time, day, or condition.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.51}}903.2.51  KEEP OFF MEDIAN Sign (R11-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.62)==
 
<center>
{|
|[[File:R11-1.jpg|thumb|center|105px|<center>'''R11-1'''</center>]]
|}
</center>
 
'''Option. '''The KEEP OFF MEDIAN (R11-1) sign may be used to prohibit driving into or parking on the median.
 
'''Guidance. '''The KEEP OFF MEDIAN sign should be installed on the left-hand side of the roadway within the median at random intervals as needed wherever there is a tendency for encroachment.
 
'''Support. '''A median is the area between two roadways of a divided highway measured from edge of travel way to edge of travel way or the area between a highway and an outer road.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.52}}903.2.52  ROAD CLOSED Sign (R11-2) and LOCAL TRAFFIC ONLY Signs (R11-3 and R11-4) (MUTCD Section 2B.63)==
 
<center>
{|
|[[File:R11-2.jpg|thumb|center|135px|<center>'''R11-2'''</center>]]
|[[File:R11-3.jpg|thumb|center|170px|<center>'''R11-3'''</center>]]
|[[File:R11-4.jpg|thumb|center|170px|<center>'''R11-4'''</center>]]
|}
</center>
 
'''Guidance. '''The ROAD CLOSED (R11-2) sign should be installed where roads have been closed to all traffic (except authorized vehicles).
 
ROAD CLOSED—LOCAL TRAFFIC ONLY (R11-3) or ROAD CLOSED TO THRU TRAFFIC (R11-4) signs should be used where through traffic is not permitted, or for a closure some distance beyond the sign, but where the highway is open for local traffic up to the point of closure.
 
'''Standard. '''The Road Closed (R11-2, R11-3, and R11-4) signs shall be designed as horizontal rectangles. These signs shall be preceded by the applicable Advance Road Closed warning sign with the secondary legend AHEAD and, if applicable, an Advance Detour warning sign (see  [[616.8 TTC Zone Warning Signs (MUTCD Chapter 6H) #616.8.4|EPG 616.8.4]]).
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.53}}903.2.53  Weight Limit Sign (R12-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.64)==
 
<center>
{|
|[[File:R12-1.jpg|thumb|center|105px|<center>'''R12-1'''</center>]]
|}
</center>
 
'''Support. '''In 2022, a new load posting policy was implemented by MoDOT in the EPG. This new policy resulted from a plan of corrective action with FHWA. With this new policy, all structures on the national bridge inventory will be categorized under this new policy within the next 10 years. There are 10,387 structures on the state system. 270 of these structures are major or unusual structures and these will be categorized over the next 10 years. The remaining 10,117 structures consist of 6,940 normal bridges and 3,177 culverts. The normal bridges will be categorized in the next 4 years and the culverts will be reviewed in the last 3 years of the 10 year timeline of the plan. The R12-1 sign remains in use, with the remaining MoDOT bridge posting signs being replaced by one of three new bridge posting signs in this article.
 
'''Standard. '''Weight limit signs shall be used to indicate a structure that has a vehicle weight restriction.
 
'''Guidance. '''The units shown on any weight limit sign should be tons.
 
'''Standard. '''Weight limit signs shall be installed in accordance with the new bridge posting classifications once completed.
 
A weight limit sign shall be located at the applicable structure in accordance with (see [[#tab903.2.53|Table 903.2.53]] and [[#fig903.2.53.1|Figures 903.2.53.1]] to [[#fig903.2.53.3|903.2.53.3]]).
 
An additional weight limit sign, with an advisory distance or directional legend, shall be located in advance of the applicable section of highway or structure so that prohibited vehicles can detour or turn around prior to the limit zone.
 
In commercial zones, bridges with the capacity of more the 65 tons shall not be posted, as normally loads in excess of 65 tons will not occur.
 
Once a bridge has been categorized, the bridge posting signs shall be updated within 30 days of the bridge posting reclassification. This includes installing the correct sign and configuring the sign locations to match the appropriate bridge posting figure (see [[#fig903.2.53.1|Figures 903.2.53.1]] to [[#fig903.2.53.3|903.2.53.3]]).
 
'''Support. '''If existing weight limit signs need to be replaced prior to a bridge being categorized, contact Highway Safety and Traffic Division, Signing Section, for guidance.
 
<div align="center";>
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="text-align:center;"
|+ Table 903.2.53, Listing of Bridge Posting Categories
! style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan="6" | Statewide Legal Load Posting Gross Weight Categories
|-
|-
|align="center"|County Route||-||-||-||-||X
! Classification || Category || Description || Sign Verbiage || Sign || Figure
|-
|-
|align="center"|Forest Route||-||-||-||X||-
| Normal Legal || SW-1 || No Posting Required || N/A || N/A || N/A
|-
|-
|align="center"|Street Name||-||-||-||X||-
| Normal Legal || SW-2 || General Gross Weight Limit || Weight Limit XX Tons || R12-1 || 903.5.36.1
|-
|-
|align="center"|Destination||-||-||-||X||-
| Normal Legal || SW-3 || Single Unit Vehicle Gross Weight Limit || Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons || R12-12 || 903.5.36.1
|-
|-
|align="center"|Reference Location||-||-||-||X||-
| Normal Legal || SW-4 || Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limit || Weight Limit Combination XX Tons || R12-13 || 903.5.36.1
|-
|-
|Information||-||-||-||X||-
| Normal Legal || SW-5 || Single Unit Vehicle and Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limits || Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons Combination XX Tons || R12-14 || 903.5.36.1
|-
|-
|align="center"|Evacuation Route||-||-||-||X||-
| colspan="6" | </br>
|-
|-
|align="center"|Road User Service||-||-||-||X||-
! style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan="6" | Statewide Legal Load Posting Centerline Restriction with Gross Weight Categories
|-
|-
|align="center"|Recreational||-||-||-||X||-
! Classification || Category || Description || Sign Verbiage || Sign || Figure
|-
|-
|Temporary Traffic Control||X||-||-||-||-
| Lane Restricted || LR-1 || Lane Restriction Only || N/A || N/A || 903.5.36.3
|-
|-
|Incident Management||X||-||-||-||-
| Lane Restricted || LR-2 || Lane Restriction with General Gross Weight Limit || Weight Limit XX Tons || R12-1 || 903.5.36.2
|-
|-
|Changeable Message Signs*||-||-||-||X||X
| Lane Restricted || LR-3 || Lane Restriction with Single Unit Vehicle Gross Weight Limit || Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons || R12-12 || 903.5.36.2
|-
|-
|School||X||-||-||-||-
| Lane Restricted || LR-4 || Lane Restriction with Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limit || Weight Limit Combination XX Tons || R12-13 || 903.5.36.2
|-
|-
|colspan="6"|*  Reverse colors or fluorescent yellow-green pixels may also be used on changeable message signs.
| Lane Restricted || LR-5 || Lane Restriction with Single Unit Vehicle and Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limits || Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons Combination XX Tons || R12-14 || 903.5.36.2
|}
 
 
====<center>''Table 903.1.18.2 Common Uses of Sign Background Colors''</center>====
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|+
! style="background:#BEBEBE" rowspan ="2"|Type of Sign
!style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan="10"|Background
|-
|-
!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Black!!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Blue!!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Brown!! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Green!!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Orange!!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Red !!style="background:#BEBEBE"|White!!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Fluorescent Yellow!!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Fluorescent Yellow-Green!!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Fluorescent Pink
| colspan="6" | </br>
|-
|-
|Regulatory||X||-||-||-||-||X||X||-||-||-
! style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan="6" | Commercial Zone Areas Gross Weight Categories
|-
|-
|align="center"|Prohibitive||-||-||-||-||-||X||X||-||-||-
! Classification || Category || Description || Sign Verbiage || Sign || Figure
|-
|-
|align="center"|Permissive||-||-||-||-||-||-||X||-||-||-
| Commercial Zone || CZ-1 || No Posting Required || N/A || N/A || N/A
|-
|-
|Warning||-||-||-||-||-||-||-||X||-||-
| Commercial Zone || CZ-2 || General Gross Weight Limit || Weight Limit XX Tons || R12-1 || 903.5.36.1
|-
|-
|align="center"|Pedestrian||-||-||-||-||-||-||-||X||X||-
| Commercial Zone || CZ-3 || Single Unit Vehicle Gross Weight Limit || Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons || R12-12 || 903.5.36.1
|-
|-
|align="center"|Bicycle||-||-||-||-||-||-||-||X||X||-
| Commercial Zone || CZ-4 || Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limit || Weight Limit Combination XX Tons || R12-13 || 903.5.36.1
|-
|-
|Guide||-||-||-||X||-||-||-||-||-||-
| Commercial Zone || CZ-5 || Single Unit Vehicle and Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limits || Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons Combination XX Tons || R12-14 || 903.5.36.1
|-
|-
|align="center"|Interstate Route||-||X||-||-||-||X||-||-||-||-
| colspan="6" | </br>
|-
|-
|align="center"|State Route||-||-||-||-||-||-||X||-||-||-
! style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan="6" | Other Miscellaneous Load Posting Categories
|-
|-
|align="center"|US Route||-||-||-||-||-||-||X||-||-||-
! Classification || Category || Description || Sign Verbiage || Sign || Figure
|-
|-
|align="center"|County Route||-||X||-||-||-||-||-||-||-||-
| Fire Truck || FT-1|| General Gross Weight Limit for Emergency Vehicles Included in the FAST Act, Federal Reauthorization Bill || Weight Limit XX Tons || R12-1 || 903.5.36.1
|-
|-
|align="center"|Forest Route||-||-||X||-||-||-||-||-||-||-
| Closed Bridge || K-CD || Closed to All Traffic || N/A || N/A || N/A
|-
|-
|align="center"|Street Name||-||-||-||X||-||-||-||-||-||-
| Closed Bridge || K-CIF || Closed to All Traffic as the Result of a Critical Inspection Finding || N/A || N/A || N/A
|-
|-
|align="center"|Destination||-||-||-||X||-||-||-||-||-||-
| Other || OT-1 || For Local Agency Bridges that have Signage that Doesn't Fit the Normal Legal, Lane Restricted, or Commercial Zone Categories || N/A || N/A || N/A
|-
|-
|align="center"|Reference Location||-||-||-||X||-||-||-||-||-||-
|}
</div>
 
<div class="flex-container1">
{{SpanID|fig903.2.53.1}}
<div>[[File:Figure 903.2.53.1 Weight Limit Restrictions.png|center|alt=A horizontal segment of roadway is shown. The middle of the roadway segment is illustrated to be crossing a bridge. The centerline of the roadway is a single dashed yellow line with one lane in each direction. On either side of the bridge, a WEIGHT LIMIIT SIGN is posted, facing the oncoming traffic. At the top of the figure are 4 different Weight Limit sign faces with a table below. These sign faces and the table are to help indicate what sign type and size to use at the beginning of a bridge crossing. The signs faces included in the table are R12-1, R12-12, R12-13, and R12-14.
|700px|thumb|<center>'''Figure 903.2.53.1''' Weight Limit Restrictions</center>]] </div>
 
{{SpanID|fig903.2.53.2}}
<div>[[File:Figure 903.2.53.2 One Lane Bridge Weight and Width Restrictions.png|center|alt=A horizontal segment of roadway is shown. The middle of the roadway segment is illustrated to be crossing a bridge. The centerline of the roadway is a double solid yellow line with one lane in each direction. Multiple sign faces are shown at varying distances on either side of the brdige, facing ocoming traffic. These signs include a W5-3,  W12-1,  W3-2, and a R1-2 sign. At the top of the figure are 4 different Weight Limit sign faces with a table below. These sign faces and the table are to help indicate what sign type and size to use at the beginning of a bridge crossing. The signs faces included in the table are R12-1, R12-12, R12-13, and R12-14. There is a note to "See EPG 903.3.72 for placement of Type 3 Object Markers" in the bottom right corner of the figure.|700px|thumb|<center>'''Figure 903.2.53.2''' One Lane Bridge Weight and Width Restrictions</center>]]</div>
 
{{SpanID|fig903.2.53.3}}
<div>[[File:Figure 903.2.53.3 One Lane Bridge Width Restrictions.png|center|alt=A horizontal segment of roadway is shown. The middle of the roadway segment is illustrated to be crossing a bridge. The centerline of the roadway is a double solid yellow line with one lane in each direction. Multiple sign faces are shown at varying distances on either side of the brdige, facing ocoming traffic. These signs include a W5-3,,  W3-2, and a R1-2 sign. There is a note to "See EPG 903.3.72 for placement of Type 3 Object Markers" in the bottom right corner of the figure.|700px|thumb|<center>'''Figure 903.2.53.3''' One Lane Bridge Width Restrictions</center>]]</div>
</div>
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.54}}903.2.54  Weigh Station Sign (R13 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.65)==
 
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|-
|Information||-||X||-||X||-||-||-||-||-||-
||[[image:R13-11.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R13-11'''</center>|130px]]
|-
||[[image:R13-15P.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R13-15P'''</center>|130px]]
|align="center"|Evacuation Route||-||X||-||-||-||-||-||-||-||-
||[[image:R13-16.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R13-16'''</center>|80px]]
|-
|}
|align="center"|Road User Service||-||X||-||-||-||-||-||-||-||-
 
|-
'''Standard. '''The BUSES WEIGH sign (R13-11) should be used at all weigh stations to supplement the standard weigh station signing.
|align="center"|Recreational||-||-||X||X||-||-||-||-||-||-
 
|-
'''Guidance. '''The OPEN-CLOSED plaque (R13-15P) should be installed below all WEIGH STATION RIGHT LANE signs whenever an automatic OPEN-CLOSED sign has not been provided.
|Temporary Traffic Control||-||-||-||-||X||-||-||-||-||-
 
|-
The BEFORE PULLING ON SCALE (R13-16) sign should be installed just to the right of the weigh scale and immediately in front thereof. A 30 in. STOP sign should be mounted above the sign.
|Incident Management||-||-||-||-||X||-||-||-||-||X
 
|-
=={{SpanID|903.2.55}}903.2.55  TRUCK ROUTE Sign (R14-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.66)==
|Changeable Message Signs*||X||-||-||-||-||-||-||-||-||-
 
|-
<center>
|School||-||-||-||-||-||-||-||X||X||-
{|
|-
|[[File:R14-1.png|thumb|center|135px|<center>'''R14-1'''</center>]]
|colspan="11"|*  Reverse colors or fluorescent yellow-green pixels may also be used on changeable message signs.
|}
</center>
 
'''Guidance. '''The TRUCK ROUTE (R14-1) sign should be used to mark a route that has been designated to allow truck traffic.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.56}}903.2.56  Photo Enforced Signs and Plaques (R10-18a and R10-19P) (MUTCD Section 2B.69)==
 
<center>
{|
|[[File:R10-18a.jpg|thumb|center|<center>'''R10-18a'''</center>|105px]]
|[[File:R10-19P.jpg|thumb|center|<center>'''R10-19P'''</center>|105px]]
|}
</center>
 
'''Option. '''A Signal Ahead (W3-3) sign and a Traffic Signal Photo Enforced (R10-18a) sign may be used on the same approach provided that they are on separate supports.
 
A Photo Enforced (R10-19P) plaque may be mounted below a regulatory sign to advise road users that the regulation is being enforced by photographic equipment.
 
'''Standard. '''The Traffic Signal Photo Enforced (R10-18a) sign shall be used on approaches to signalized locations where red-light cameras are present.
 
The Traffic Signal Photo Enforced (R10-18a) sign shall not be installed on approaches to signalized locations where red-light cameras are not present on any of the approaches to the signalized location.
 
A Traffic Signal Photo Enforced (R10-18a) sign shall not be installed on the same support in combination with a Signal Ahead (W3-3) sign.
 
If used below a regulatory sign, the Photo Enforced (R10-19P) plaque shall be a rectangle with a black legend and border on a white background.
 
'''Support. '''For more information about photo enforcement requirements, see [[:Category:950 Automated Traffic Enforcement|EPG 950]].
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.57}}903.2.57  STATE LAW MOVE OVER OR SLOW DOWN FOR STOPPED EMERGENCY VEHICLES Sign (R16-25) (MUTCD Section 2B.71)==
 
<center>
{|
| [[File:R16-25.jpg|thumb|center|175px|<center>'''R16-25'''</center>]]
|}
</center>
 
'''Support. '''The STATE LAW MOVE OVER OR SLOW DOWN FOR STOPPED EMERGENCY VEHICLES (R16-25) sign is used to inform motorists of Missouri Revised Statutes 304.022, which requires motorists to drive with caution when approaching stopped emergency vehicles.
 
'''Guidance. '''The STATE LAW MOVE OVER OR SLOW DOWN FOR STOPPED EMERGENCY VEHICLES sign should be installed on Interstates entering the state at the state line. The location of the sign should be as close to the state line as possible and placed at the discretion of MoDOT.
 
'''Option. '''Additional STATE LAW MOVE OVER OR SLOW DOWN FOR STOPPED EMERGENCY VEHICLES signs may be installed on U.S. routes entering the state where there are no adjacent interstates and rest areas at the request of the Missouri State Highway Patrol.
 
'''Standard. '''Requests for additional signs shall be forwarded to the appropriate district engineer for approval. These signs shall only be installed on divided highways. The installation of this sign shall not interfere with or detract from any other regulatory, warning, or guide signs.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.58}}903.2.58  Headlight Use Signs (R16-5a) (MUTCD Section 2B.73)==
 
'''Support. '''The HEADLIGHTS ON WHEN WIPERS ARE REQUIRED (R16-5a) sign, supported by RSMo 307.020 in 2004, was developed to inform motorists of the new law directing them to turn on headlights when wipers are on and during inclement weather. The use of these signs has been discontinued as the law has been in place for more than 15 years and many vehicles come equipped with headlights that turn on when wipers are activated. Existing signs are to be removed at the end of their sign life.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.59}}903.2.59 Seat Belt Symbol (MUTCD Section 2B.74)==
 
<center>
{|
| [[File:R16-30.jpg|thumb|center|175px|<center>'''R16-30'''</center>]]
|}
|}
</center>
'''Guidance. '''The seat belt symbol should not be used alone. If used, the seat belt symbol should be incorporated into regulatory sign messages for mandatory seat belt use.
'''Support. '''The seat belt symbol is illustrated in the FHWA “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see  [[911 General (MUTCD Part 1) #911.1.5|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]).
'''Guidance. '''The R16-2, R16-3, R16-24, R16-27, and R16-27a seatbelt signs have been discontinued. These signs should remain in place to the end of their service life.
The STATE LAW BUCKLE UP PHONE DOWN (R16-30) sign should be installed at the end of the on ramp of rest areas and Missouri Welcome Centers on the interstate system. The STATE LAW BUCKLE UP PHONE DOWN (R16-30a) sign should be installed on Interstate and U.S. Routes at the state line entering Missouri. Neither sign should be installed at any other location along a roadway.
'''Support. '''A growing number of cities and counties are passing local ordinances to make seat belt usage a primary law in their communities. To promote the use of seat belts a PRIMARY SEAT BELT CITY / COUNTY - ORDINANCE sign may be installed by MoDOT upon request.
'''Standard. '''If a city/county has an established primary seat belt ordinance, MoDOT will install PRIMARY SEAT BELT CITY / COUNTY - ORDINANCE signs upon request once a copy of the ordinance has been received. When the PRIMARY SEAT BELT CITY / COUNTY - ORDINANCE is installed they shall be mounted to the right of the city limit sign or the entering county line sign.
'''Option. '''If insufficient space is available to mount the assembly to the right of these signs, the assembly shall be installed 200 ft. downstream of the city limit or county line signs at the appropriate sign spacing.


==903.1.19 Dimensions (MUTCD Section 2A.12)==
=={{SpanID|903.2.60}}903.2.60  Barricades (MUTCD Section 2B.75)==


'''Support.''' Sign sizes for use on the different classes of highways are shown in [[903.5 Regulatory Signs#903.5.3 Dimensions (MUTCD Section 2B.03)|EPG 903.5.3]], [[903.6 Warning Signs#903.6.4 Size of Warning Signs (MUTCD Section 2C.04)|EPG 903.6.4]], [[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.4 Lettering Style (MUTCD Section 2D.05) |EPG 903.7.4]], [[903.16 Traffic Controls for School Areas#903.16.5 School Signs (MUTCD Section 7B)|EPG 903.16.5]] and [[903.17 Traffic Controls for Highway-Rail Grade Crossings#903.17.6 Signs and Markings (MUTCD Section 8B)|EPG 903.17.6.1]], the [[616.23 Traffic Control for Field Operations|MoDOT Traffic Control for Field Operations]] and in ''Standard Highway Signs''.
'''Option. '''Barricades may be used to mark any of the following conditions:
::A. The end of a roadway,
::B. A ramp or lane that is closed for operational purposes, or
::C. The permanent or semi-permanent closure or termination of a roadway.


Standard Highway Signs prescribes design details for up to five different sizes depending on the type of traffic facility, including bikeways. Smaller sizes are designed to be used on bikeways and some other off-road applications. Larger sizes are designed for use on freeways and expressways and can also be used to enhance road user safety and convenience on other facilities, especially on multi-lane divided highways and on undivided highways having five or more lanes of traffic and/or high speeds.  The intermediate sizes are designed to be used on other highway types.
'''Standard. '''When used to warn and alert road users of the terminus of a roadway, other than in temporary traffic control zones, barricades shall meet the design criteria of [[616.11 TTC Zone Channelizing Devices (MUTCD Chapter 6K) #616.11.7|EPG 616.11.7]] for a Type 3 Barricade, except that the colors of the stripes shall be retroreflective white and retroreflective red.


'''Standard.''' The sign dimensions prescribed in this article, the Sign Detail Manual, and the federal ''Standard Highway Signs'' shall be used unless engineering judgment determines that other sizes are appropriate. Where engineering judgment determines that sizes smaller than the prescribed dimensions are appropriate for use, the sign dimensions shall not be less than the minimum dimensions specified in this article. Where engineering judgment determines that sizes larger than the prescribed dimensions are appropriate for use, standard shapes and colors shall be used and standard proportions shall be retained as much as practical.
'''Option. '''An end-of-roadway marker or markers may be used as described in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.73|EPG 903.3.73]].


'''Guidance.''' Increases above the prescribed sizes should be used where greater legibility or emphasis is needed.  Wherever practical, the overall sign dimensions should be increased in 12-in. increments.
'''Guidance. '''Appropriate advance warning signs (see [[903.3 Ground-Mounted Sign Supports #903.3|EPG 903.3]]) should be used.


==903.1.20 Symbols (MUTCD Section 2A.13)==
=={{SpanID|903.2.61}}903.2.61  NO PARKING ALL TRAILERS AND TRUCKS OVER 6 TONS (R7-36)==


'''Support.''' Sometimes a change from word messages to symbols requires significant time for public education and transition.  Therefore, this article includes the practice of using educational plaques to accompany some new symbol signs.
[[File:R7-36.png|thumb|center|105px|alt=|<center>'''R7-36'''</center>]]


'''Standard.''' Symbol designs shall in all cases be unmistakably similar to those shown in this article, the Sign Detail Manual and the federal ''Standard Highway Signs''. New symbol designs shall be adopted by the Federal Highway Administration based on research evaluations to determine road user comprehension, sign conspicuity, and sign legibility.
'''Standard. '''NO PARKING ALL TRAILERS AND TRUCKS OVER 6 TONS (R7-36) signs shall be placed in each commuter parking lot. A sign shall be installed at or near each entrance of the commuter parking lot.


'''Guidance.''' An educational plaque should accompany new warning or regulatory symbol signs not readily recognizable by the public.
'''Support. '''This parking restriction is necessary because commuter lots have been used by commercial trailers and trucks for extended periods of parking.


'''Option.'''  State and/or local highway agencies may conduct research studies to determine road user comprehension, sign conspicuity, and sign legibility.
=={{SpanID|903.2.62}}903.2.62 STOP FOR SCHOOL BUS SIGN (R16-26)==


Educational plaques may be left in place as long as they are in serviceable condition.
'''Standard. '''The STOP FOR SCHOOL BUS (R16-26) sign has been discontinued. MoDOT shall no longer provide STOP FOR SCHOOL BUS (R16-26) signs. Existing STOP FOR SCHOOL BUS (R16-26) signs shall be left in place until they reach the end of their service life.


Although most standard symbols are oriented facing left, mirror images of these symbols may be used where the reverse orientation might better convey to road users a direction of movement.
=={{SpanID|903.2.63}}903.2.63 Other Regulatory Signs==


==903.1.21 Word Messages (MUTCD Section 2A.14)==
'''Option. '''Regulatory word message signs other than those classified and specified in the EPG and the federal Standard Highway Signs and Markings book may be developed to aid the enforcement of other laws or regulations.


'''Standard.'''  Except as noted in Types of Fabricated Signs, all word messages shall use standard wording and letters as shown in this article, the Sign Detail Manual, and the federal ''Standard Highway Signs''.
Except for symbols on regulatory signs, minor modifications in the design may be permitted provided that the essential appearance characteristics are met.


'''Guidance.''' Word messages should be as brief as possible and the lettering is to be large enough to provide the necessary legibility distance.  A minimum specific ratio, such as 1 inch of letter height per 40 ft. of legibility distance, should be used.
'''Standard. '''Special regulatory signs shall be approved by the State Highway Safety and Traffic Engineer.


'''Support.'''  Some research indicates that a ratio of 1 in. of letter height per 33 ft. of legibility distance could be beneficial.
=={{SpanID|903.2.64}}903.2.64 Engine Brake Muffler Required Signing==


'''Guidance.''' Abbreviations (refer to [[903.19 Highway Signing General Information#903.19.14 Abbreviations Used on Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD Section 1A.14)|EPG 903.19.14]]) should be kept to a minimum and should include only those that are commonly recognized and understood such as AVE (for Avenue), BLVD (for Boulevard) and JCT (for Junction).
[[File:R5-23.jpg|thumb|center|105px|alt=|<center>'''R5-23'''</center>]]


'''Standard.''' All sign lettering shall be in capital letters as established in Sign Design and the federal Standard Highway Signs except as indicated in the Option below.  
'''History. '''MoDOT once had a NOISE ORDINANCE ENFORCED policy which was developed to address cities’ requests to install NO JAKE BRAKE signing. These requests were generated when a community experienced excessive noise related to improperly installed/operated engine braking systems on commercial vehicles. Jake brakes, or engine braking systems, are safety features of commercial vehicles. MoDOT was not willing to post signs on state routes which prohibited the use of these safety devices. However, to address the increasing requests for signing, MoDOT did permit the installation of NOISE ORDINANCE ENFORCED signs if a city passed an appropriate ordinance. This program was replaced with the current ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLERS REQUIRED signing in January 2022. This change was designed to address shortcomings of the noise ordinance signing program, which included difficulty in enforcing a noise level and noise ordinances which did not contain language relevant to engine braking noise levels. The current program is based on the direction other states have taken, focusing on the physical equipment on a commercial vehicle which can be more easily inspected and evaluated for deficiencies. This signing program is also targeting the primary concern of excessive noise from engine braking.


'''Option.''' Word messages on street name signs and destinations on guide signs may be composed of a combination of lower case letters with initial upper case letters.
'''Support. '''Commercial vehicles are commonly equipped with an engine braking system. These systems supplement the vehicle’s mechanical brakes aiding in slowing these heavy vehicles safely. These safety systems, when not properly installed, can create excessive noise which many communities find objectionable. MoDOT does not permit regulatory signs which prohibit the use of these safety devices, however, the ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLERS REQUIRED signing conveys to truck drivers they must use these safety devices in an appropriate manner.


==903.1.22 Sign Borders (MUTCD Section 2A.15)==
'''Option. '''If a community experiences issues with excessive noise from improperly used and installed engine braking systems on commercial vehicles, they can pass an ordinance and request MoDOT to install ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLERS REQUIRED signing at their city limit sign locations. MoDOT will install and maintain these signs with only a copy of the ordinance for our records, no fee or contract is involved. A jurisdiction can pass an ordinance specifically related to engine braking or include the language as part of another ordinance, such as a noise ordinance.
Refer to [[Sign Detail]] for border information.


==903.1.23 Location Standardization (MUTCD Section 2A.16)==
'''Standard. '''Before MoDOT will install ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLERS REQUIRED signing, a city must pass an appropriate ordinance which will be approved and kept on file by CO Highway Safety and Traffic. The ordinance shall include the following language:


'''Support.'''  Standardization of position cannot always be attained in practice. Examples of heights and lateral locations of signs for typical installations are illustrated in Figure 903.1.23.1 and examples of locations for typical signs at intersections are illustrated in Figures 903.1.23.2 and 903.1.23.3.
Engine compression braking devices on any commercial vehicle, as defined in Missouri Revised Statute RSMo Section 301.010, may only be used within the city limits of [CITY NAME] if the truck is equipped with an adequate muffler (factory muffler or equivalent aftermarket muffler) which is properly maintained to prevent any excessive or unusual noise. If the truck’s exhaust system is equipped with a muffler cut-off, bypass, or similar device, that device shall not be activated when the engine brake is being utilized. Unmuffled engine braking system shall only be utilized within the city limits by commercial motor vehicles in emergency situations to protect life or property. Engine braking systems on rescue vehicles, city and state vehicles are exempt from this ordinance if used in the performance of official duties.


'''Standard.'''  Signs requiring multiple decisions by the traveler shall be spaced sufficiently far apart for the required decisions to be made reasonably safely.  One of the factors considered when determining the appropriate spacing shall be the posted or 85th-percentile speed.
ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLER REQUIRED signing shall only be installed at the city limit location.


'''Guidance.'''  Signs should be located on the right side of the roadway where they are easily recognized and understood by travelers.  Signs in other locations should be considered only as supplementary to signs in the normal locations, except as otherwise indicated.
ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLER REQUIRED signing shall not be installed on freeways or expressways within the city limits where the posted speed limit is 45 mph or greater due to the critical need for the device at higher speeds.


Signs should be individually installed on separate posts or mountings except where:
Existing NOISE ORDINANCE ENFORCED signs shall be removed at the end of the signs’ service life, with no new NOISE ORDINANCE ENFORCED signs being installed after January 2022.


A. One sign supplements another, or
Individual sign installation locations can be denied by MoDOT if engineering judgement determines the prohibition would negatively impact safety, such as on long steep grades or abrupt/unexpected approaches to intersections.


B. Route or directional signs are grouped to clarify information to motorists, or
'''Option. '''If the city limit on a freeway or expressway is within a posted speed limit of 45 mph or greater and the posted speed limit on that route drops to 40 mph or less, the ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLER REQUIRED sign may be installed adjacent to the speed limit sign where the speed limit drops below 45 mph.


C. Regulatory signs that do not conflict with each other are grouped, such as turn prohibition signs posted with one-way signs, street name signs posted with a stop or yield sign, or a parking regulation sign posted with a speed limit sign.
At the end of a NOISE ORDINANCE ENFORCED sign’s life, or before, a city may request the new ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLER REQUIRED signing once the appropriate ordinance is passed.


Signs should be located so that they:
If there is insufficient space to the right of the city limit sign to place the ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLER REQUIRED sign, it may be installed 200 ft. downstream of the city limit sign.


A. Are outside the clear zone unless placed on a breakaway or yielding support (see Lateral Offset);
=={{SpanID|903.2.65}}903.2.65 Regulatory Signs For Trash/Dumping (R5-26, R5-28)==


B. Optimize nighttime visibility;
[[File:R5-18.gif|thumb|center|220px|alt=|<center>'''R5-28'''</center>]]


C. Minimize the effects of mud splatter and debris;
'''Standard. '''The NO DUMPING sign (R5-28) shall be erected only at locations where the Department of Natural Resources has given us written notice that solid waste is being disposed of on highway right of way. NO MORE TRASH signs (R5-26) are not typically installed along MoDOT roadways. NO MORE TRASH signs (R5-26) should only be installed at commuter lots, rest areas or roadside parks. NO MORE TRASH signs shall only be installed along the roadway if a major liter issue has been identified and the sign is needed for enforcement purposes. Existing NO MORE TRASH signs (R5-26) shall be left in place until they reach the end of their service life.


D. Do not obscure each other;
=={{SpanID|903.2.66}}903.2.66 Regulation Signs For Roadside Parks and Commuter Parking Lots (R20-1)==


E. Are not hidden from view; and
[[image:R19-1.gif|center|thumb|<center>'''R20-1'''</center>|175px]]


F. Do not block view of intersection.
'''Support. '''Regulation signs are displayed at MoDOT maintained roadside parks and commuter parking lots to convey the rules and regulations pertaining to each type of facility.
 
'''Guidance. '''A minimum of one regulation sign should be installed at each MoDOT maintained roadside park and commuter parking lot, with the sign(s) being installed in centralized location(s) where the sign will be within normal sight of visitors once they leave their vehicles.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.67}}903.2.67 Rest Area Regulatory Signing (R20-2, R20-3, R20-4)==
 
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|[[image:R20-2.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R20-2'''</center>|195px]]
||[[image:R19-3.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R20-3'''</center>|175px]]
|| [[image:R19-4.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R20-4'''</center>|125px]]
|}


'''Support.''' The clear zone is the roadside border area measured from the edge of the pavement that is available for the safe use by errant vehicles as determined according to Chapter 3 of the ''AASHTO Roadside Design Guide''.  The width of the clear zone depends on traffic volumes, speeds and roadside geometry.
'''Guidance. '''The REST AREA MAINTAINED BY (R20-3) sign should be installed in a prominent area along the entrance ramp to the rest area, preferably in the gore area separating truck / car traffic.


'''Guidance.''' Because of increased traffic, an order of sign installation priority should be established to provide travelers with regulatory, warning, and guidance information.
'''Standard. '''The TRUCKS-CARS (R20-4) sign shall be installed at the gore point inside the rest area to direct various vehicles to the appropriate parking lot.


'''Support.'''  An order of priority is especially critical where space is limited for sign installation and there is a demand for several different types of signs.  Overloading motorists with too much information is not desirable.
A minimum of three REST AREA REGULATIONS (R20-2) signs shall be installed at each rest area.


'''Guidance.'''  Because regulatory and warning information is more critical to travelers than guidance information, regulatory and warning signing whose location is critical should be displayed rather than guide signing in cases where conflicts occur.  Information of a lesser critical nature should be moved to less critical locations or omitted.
The REST AREA MAINTAINED BY (R20-3) sign shall be installed at all rest areas to inform the public who is responsible to maintain the facility prior to the gore point.


'''Option.'''  Signs may be placed on median islands or on the left side of the road under some circumstances, such as on curves to the right. A supplementary sign located on the left of the roadway may be used on a multi-lane road where traffic in the right lane might obstruct the view to the right.
=={{SpanID|903.2.68}}903.2.68 Access Management Signing (R21-1 through R21-5)==


'''Guidance.''' In urban areas where crosswalks exist, signs should not be placed within 4 ft. in advance of the crosswalk.
'''Standard. '''ACCESS MANAGEMENT (R22-1 through R22-5) signs have been discontinued. MoDOT shall no longer provide ACCESS MANAGEMENT (R22-1 through R22-5) signs. Existing ACCESS MANAGEMENT (R22-1 through R22-5) signs shall be left in place until they reach the end of their service life.


[[image:Figure 903.1.23.1.gif|center|800px|thumb|'''Figure 903.1.23.1 Examples of Heights and Lateral Locations of Signs for Typical Installations''']]
=={{SpanID|903.2.69}}903.2.69 Trucks and Buses 300 Ft Interval Sign (R4-30)==


[[image:Figure 903.1.23.2.gif|center|thumb|800px|'''Figure 903.1.23.2  Examples of Locations for Some Typical Signs at Intersections''']]
'''Standard.''' TRUCKS AND BUSES (R4-30) signs have been discontinued. MoDOT shall no longer provide TRUCKS AND BUSES (R4-30) signs. Existing TRUCKS AND BUSES (R4-30) signs shall be left in place until they reach the end of their service life.


[[image:Figure 903.1.23.3.gif|center|thumb|frame|'''Figure 903.1.23.3''']]
=={{SpanID|903.2.70}}903.2.70 FINES DOUBLED ENDS Sign (R2-20)==


[[File:R2-20.jpg|center|thumb|70px|<center>'''R2-20'''</center>]]


'''Support. '''The FINES DOUBLED ENDS (R2-20) sign is not to be used on a system-wide basis. It is part of a signing package intended for special use at locations where severe crashes are occurring. There is a requirement for regional support to focus a safety campaign involving local law enforcement and public information efforts to reduce the number and severity of crashes within the travel safe zone (see [[907.3 Travel Safe Zones #907.3.2|EPG 907.3.2]]).


[[Category:903 Highway Signing|903.01]]
'''Standard: '''A FINES DOUBLED ENDS sign shall be used to mark the end of a designated travel safe zone. This sign is installed in conjunction with the TRAVEL SAFE ZONE – FINES DOUBLED (W26-1) sign.

Latest revision as of 12:17, 1 December 2025

903.2.1 Application of Regulatory Signs (MUTCD Section 2B.01)

Standard. Regulatory signs shall be used to inform road users of selected traffic laws or regulations and to indicate the applicability of the legal requirements.

Regulatory signs shall be installed at or near where the regulations apply. The signs shall clearly indicate the requirements imposed by the regulations and shall be designed and installed to provide adequate visibility and legibility in order to obtain compliance.

Regulatory signs shall be retroreflective or illuminated (see EPG 903.1.21).

903.2.2 Design of Regulatory Signs (MUTCD Section 2B.02)

Standard. Regulatory signs shall be rectangular unless specifically designated otherwise in the EPG. Regulatory signs shall be designed in accordance with the sizes, shapes, colors, and legends contained in the FHWA “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)).

Support. The use of educational plaques to supplement symbol signs is described in EPG 903.1.9.

The use of LEDs in the border or legend of regulatory signs is described in EPG 903.1.12.

Standard. LED signs displaying a part-time prohibitory message incorporating a red circle and diagonal of a static sign shall display a red symbol that approximates the same red circle and diagonal as closely as possible. The symbol of the action to be prohibited shall be displayed in white LEDs on a black background.

A regulatory sign displayed entirely with LEDs and incorporated within the border of a larger full-matrix changeable message sign shall display the regulatory sign legend in the size, shape, color, and legend of the standard regulatory sign.

903.2.3 Size of Regulatory Signs (MUTCD Section 2B.03)

Standard. Except as provided in EPG 903.1.7, the minimum sizes for regulatory signs shall be as shown in Table 903.2.3.

Support. EPG 903.1.7 contains information regarding the applicability of the various columns in Table 903.2.3.

Guidance. The minimum sizes for regulatory signs facing traffic on exit and entrance ramps at interchanges should be as shown in the column of Table 903.2.3 that corresponds to the mainline roadway classification (Expressway/Freeway).

Standard. The minimum size for WRONG WAY and DO NOT ENTER signs on ramps facing the opposite direction of travel where a road user could wrongly enter the ramp from a conventional road shall be the size listed in the Conventional Road - Standard column of Table 903.2.3. See EPG 903.2.37 and 903.2.38 for additional information.

Option. The minimum size for WRONG WAY and DO NOT ENTER signs on ramps facing the opposite direction of travel where a road user could wrongly enter the ramp from a conventional road may be increased to the size in the Conventional Road – Oversized column of Table 903.2.3 when the need for greater emphasis has been determined based on engineering judgement.

Table 903.2.3, Regulatory Sign and Plaque Sizes
Sign or Plaque Sign Designation EPG Article Conventional Road (in. x in.) Freeway/Expressway (in. x in.)
Standard Oversized Special Mainline and Ramps
Stop R1-1 903.2.4 36 X 36 48 X 48 - 48 X 48
Yield R1-2 903.2.5 48 X 48 X 48 60 X 60 X 60 - 60 X 60 X 60
To Oncoming Traffic (plaque) R1-2aP 903.2.5 36 X 30 - - -
All-Way (plaque) R1-3P 903.2.4 30 X 12 - - -
Yield Here To Pedestrians R1-5 903.2.18 36 X 36 - - -
Yield Here to Trail Crossing R1-5d 903.2.18 36 X 42 - - -
In-Street Pedestrian Crossing - Yield R1-6 903.2.19 12 X 36 - - -
In-Street Trail Crossing - Yield R1-6d 903.2.19 12 X 36 - - -
Speed Limit R2-1 903.2.20 36 X 48 48 X 60 - 48 X 60
Combined Speed Limit R2-4a 903.2.21 - - - 48 X 96
Speed Limit _ Except Where Posted R2-5d 903.2.22 36 X 48 - - 36 X 48
Fines Doubled Ends R2-20 903.2.71 36 X 30 - - 36 X 30
No Right Turn R3-1 903.2.24 36 X 36 48 X 48 24 X 24 - 30 X 30 48 X 48
No Left Turn R3-2 903.2.24 36 X 36 48 X 48 24 X 24 - 30 X 30 48 X 48
No Turns R3-3 903.2.24 36 X 36 48 X 48 24 X 24 - 30 X 30 36 X 36
No U Turn R3-4 903.2.24 36 X 36 48 X 48 24 X 24 - 30 X 30 -
Right (Left/Ahead) Only R3-5, 5a 903.2.26 30 X 36 - - -
Straight and Right (Left) R3-6 903.2.27 30 X 36 - - -
Optional Movement U and Left Turn R3-6a 903.2.27 30 X 36 - - -
Optional Movement Left Turns R3-6b 903.2.27 30 X 36 - - -
Right (Left) Lane Must Turn Right (Left) R3-7 903.2.26 36 X 36 - - -
Advance Intersection Lane Control R3-8,8a,8b,8xa, 8xb,8xc 903.2.28 Varies X 30 - - -
Two-Way Left Turn Only (overhead) R3-9a 903.2.29 30 X 36 - - -
Center Lane Two-Way Left Turn Only (post-mounted) R3-9b 903.2.29 24 X 36 36 X 48 - -
No U Turn/No Left Turn R3-18 903.2.24 36 X 36 48 X 48 24 X 24 - 30 X 30 -
No Straight Through R3-27 903.2.24 36 X 36 48 X 48 24 X 24 - 30 X 30 48 X 48
Do Not Pass R4-1 903.2.31 36 X 48 36 X 48 -
Pass With Care R4-2 903.2.32 36 X 48 48 X 60 -
Slower Traffic Keep Right R4-3 903.2.33 36 X 48 48 X 60 48 X 60 48 X 60
Keep Right R4-7 903.2.34 24 X 30 36 X 48 36 X 48 48 X 60
Keep Right (horizontal arrow) R4-7a 903.2.34 36 X 48 48 X 60 48 X 60 48 X 60
Keep Right (45° arrow) R4-7b 903.2.34 36 X 48 48 X 60 - 84 X 96
Narrow Keep Right R4-7c 903.2.34 18 X 30 - - -
Keep Left R4-8 903.2.34 24 X 30 36 X 48 - 48 X 60
Keep Left (horizontal arrow) R4-8a 903.2.34 36 X 48 48 X 60 - 48 X 60
Keep Left (45° arrow) R4-8b 903.2.34 36 X 48 48 X 60 - 84 X 96
Narrow Keep Left R4-8c 903.2.34 18 X 30 - - -
Keep Right Except to Pass R4-16 903.2.33 36 X 48 - - -
Do Not Drive on Shoulder R4-17 903.2.35 36 X 48 - - -
Next Passing Lane _ Miles R4-28 903.2.69 - - - -
End Passing Lanes R4-29 903.2.69 - - - -
Do Not Enter R5-1 903.2.37 36 X 36 48 X 48 - 48 X 48
Wrong Way R5-1a 903.2.39 42 X 30 - - 42 X 30
No Trucks R5-2 903.2.36 36 X 36 - -
Except Local Deliveries (plaque) R5-2aP 903.2.36 36 X 18 - -
Engine Brake Muffler Required R5-23 - 30 X 30 - - 30 X 30
No Fishing from Bridge R5-25 903.2.36 18 X 24 - - 18 X 24
No Dumping R5-28 903.2.66 - - - 48 X 24
Authorized and Emergency Vehicles Only R5-29 903.2.36 - - - 24 X 30
Do Not Stop on Tracks R5-31 903.2.45 24 X 30 - - -
One Way R6-1 903.2.40 36 X 12 48 X 18 - 48 X 18
One Way R6-2 903.2.40 24 X 30 30 X 36 - -
Divided Highway (4-legged) R6-3 903.2.41 30 X 24 - - 36 X 30
Divided Highway (T-intersection) R6-3a 903.2.41 30 X 24 - - 36 X 30
No Parking Signs R7 series 903.2.43 18 X 24 - - -
Reserved Parking R7-8 903.2.43 18 X 24 - - -
Van Accessible (plaque) R7-8aP 903.2.43 18 X 9 - - -
No Parking on Bridge R7-35 903.2.43 18 X 24 - - 18 X 24
No Parking Trucks and Trailers Over 6 Tons R7-36 903.2.62 18 X 24 36 X 48 - -
Tow Away Zone (plaque) R7-201P, R7-201ap 903.2.43 18 X 9 -
This Side of Sign (plaque) R7-202P 903.2.43 18 X 9 - -
Emergency Stopping Only R8-7 903.2.45 48 X 36 - - 48 X 36
No Pedestrian Crossing (symbol) R9-3 903.2.46 18 X 24 - - -
No Pedestrian Crossing R9-3a 903.2.46 18 X 24 - - -
Pedestrian Signal Series R10-3 & R10-4 series 903.2.47 9 X 15 - - -
Left on Green Arrow Only R10-5 903.2.48 24 X 30 30 X 36 - 30 X 36
Stop Here on Red R10-6 903.2.48 24 X 36 - - -
Do Not Block Intersection R10-7 903.2.48 24 X 30 - - -
Right Turn Signal R10-10R - 30 X 36 - - -
No Turn on Red R10-11 903.2.49 30 X 36 - - -
Left Turn on Green (Ball) R10-12 903.2.48 24 X 30 30 X 36 - 30 X 36
Left Turn Yield on Flashing Yellow Arrow R10-12a 903.2.48 24 X 30 30 X 36 - 30 X 36
Emergency Signal R10-13 903.2.48 36 X 24 - - -
Emergency Signal Stop on Flashing Red R10-14 903.2.48 36 X 42 - - -
Emergency Signal - Stop on Flashing Red (overhead) R10-14a 903.2.48 60 X 24 - - -
Stop Here on Red R10-14b 903.2.48 24 X 36 - - -
Turning Vehicles Yield to Pedestrians R10-15 903.2.48 30 X 30 - - -
Traffic Signal Photo Enforced R10-18a 903.2.56 30 X 42 36 X 54 - -
Photo Enforced (symbol plaque) R10-19P 903.2.56 24 X 12 48 X 24 - -
Crosswalk - Stop on Red R10-23 903.2.48 24 X 30 - - -
Stop on Red - Yield on Flashing Red After Stop R10-23a 903.2.48 24 X 30 - - -
Push Button for Warning Lights - Wait for Gap in Traffic R10-25 903.2.47 9 X 12 - - -
XX Vehicles per Green R10-28 903.2.50 24 X 30 - - -
XX Vehicles per Green Each Lane R10-29 903.2.50 36 X 24 - - -
Right Turn on Red Must Yield to U-Turn R10-30 903.2.49 30 X 36 - - -
Right Turn Must Yield To U-Turn R10-30a 903.2.49 36 X 24 - - -
Keep Off Median R11-1 903.2.51 48 X 60 48 X 60 - -
Road Closed R11-2 903.2.52 48 X 30 -
Road Closed _ Miles Ahead Local Traffic Only R11-3 903.2.52 60 X 30 -
Road Closed to Thru Traffic R11-4 903.2.52 60 X 30 -
Weight Limit XX Tons R12-1 903.2.53 36 X 48 36 X 48
Weigh Station Signs R13 series 903.2.54 Varies Varies
Truck Route R14-1 903.2.55 24 X 18 -
State Law Move Over or Slow Down for Stopped Emergency Vehicles R16-25 903.2.57 120 X 60 120 X 60
Primary Seatbelt City/Country R16-27B - 30 X 36 -
State Law Buckle Up / Phone Down R16-30 903.2.59 48 X 30 -
State Law Buckle Up / Phone Down R16-30a 903.2.59 - 72 X 48
Roadside Park Signs R20-1 903.2.66 30 X 30 -
Rest Area Regulations R20-2 903.2.67 30 X 36 -
Commuter Parking Regulations R20-3 903.2.67 42 X 48 -
Rest Area Signs R20 Series 903.2.67 Varies

903.2.4 STOP Sign (R1-1) and ALL-WAY Plaque (R1-3P) (MUTCD Section 2B.04)

R1-1
R1-3P

Standard. When it is determined that a full stop is always required on an approach to an intersection, a STOP (R1-1) sign shall be used.

Secondary legends shall not be used on STOP sign faces.

The STOP sign shall not be displayed using a changeable message sign.

At intersections where all approaches are controlled by STOP signs (see EPG 903.2.11), an ALL-WAY (R1-3P) supplemental plaque shall be mounted below each STOP sign. The ALL-WAY plaque shall have a white legend and border on a red background.

Supplemental plaques with legends such as 2-WAY, 3-WAY, 4-WAY, or other numbers of ways shall not be used with STOP signs.

Support. The use of the CROSS TRAFFIC DOES NOT STOP (W4-4P Series) and other plaques with variations of this legend is described in EPG 903.3.65.

Guidance. The TRAFFIC FROM LEFT (RIGHT) DOES NOT STOP (W4-4aP) plaque or ONCOMING TRAFFIC DOES NOT STOP (W4-4bP) plaque should be used at intersections where STOP signs control all but one approach to the intersection, unless the only non-stopped approach is from a one-way street.

Support. The design and application of Stop Beacons are described in EPG 902.18.5.

903.2.5 YIELD Sign (R1-2) (MUTCD Section 2B.05)

R1-2
R1-2aP

Support. The YIELD sign requires road users to yield the right-of-way to other traffic on certain approaches to an intersection or on a two-way approach to a one-way section of roadway, such as a narrow bridge or underpass. Vehicles controlled by a YIELD sign need to slow down to a speed that is reasonable for the existing conditions or stop when necessary to avoid interfering with conflicting traffic.

Standard. The YIELD (R1-2) sign shall not be displayed using a changeable message sign.

903.2.6 General Considerations (MUTCD Section 2B.06)

Support. Unsignalized intersections represent the most common form of intersection right-of-way control. Selection of control type might be impacted by specific requirements of State law or local ordinances.

Roundabouts and traffic circles are circular intersection designs and are not traffic control devices. The decision to convert an intersection from a conventional intersection to a circular intersection is an engineering design decision and not a traffic control device decision. As such, criteria for conversion from a conventional intersection to a circular intersection are not included in EPG 903.

Guidance. The type of traffic control used at an unsignalized intersection should be the least restrictive that provides appropriate levels of safety and efficiency for all road users.

Support. Some types of right-of-way control that can exist at an unsignalized intersection in order from the least restrictive to the most restrictive are the following:

A. Yield control (see EPG 903.2.9): YIELD signs are placed on all approaches (for a circular intersection), or in the median of a divided highway. The YIELD signs are placed on the minor road.
B. Minor road stop control (see EPG 903.2.10): STOP signs are typically placed on opposing approaches (for a four-leg intersection) or on a single approach (for a three-leg intersection). The STOP signs are normally placed on the minor road. EPG 903.2.7 contains guidance on selecting the minor road.
C. All-way stop control (see EPG 903.2.11): STOP signs are placed on all approaches to the intersection.

Guidance. When selecting a form of intersection control, the following factors should be considered:

A. Motor vehicle, bicycle, and pedestrian traffic volumes on all approaches; where the term units/day or units/hour is indicated, it should be the total of motor vehicle, bicycle, and pedestrian volume;
B. Driver yielding behavior with regard to all modes of conflicting traffic, including bicyclists and pedestrians;
C. Number and angle of approaches;
D. Approach speeds;
E. Sight distance available on each approach;
F. Reported crash experience; and
G. The presence of a grade crossing near the intersection.

Standard. YIELD or STOP signs shall not be used for speed control.

Access to the state highway system from city streets, county roads or other significant private road approaches shall be controlled by installation of MoDOT STOP signs. Significant private roads are those that service 3 or more private residences.

Option. Stop signs, based on engineering judgment and a traffic study justifying the need, may be installed for a private road approach servicing fewer than 3 private residences, or a commercial entrance.

Standard. Because the potential for conflicting commands could create driver confusion, YIELD or STOP signs shall not be used in conjunction with any traffic control signal operation, except in the following cases:

A. If the signal indication for an approach is a flashing red at all times;
B. If a minor street or driveway is located within or adjacent to the area controlled by the traffic control signal, but does not require separate traffic signal control because an extremely low potential for conflict exists; or
C. If a channelized turn lane is separated from the adjacent travel lanes by an island and the channelized turn lane is not controlled by a traffic control signal.

STOP signs and YIELD signs shall not be installed on different approaches to the same unsignalized intersection if those approaches conflict with or oppose each other, except as provided for in Items A and B in the first paragraph of EPG 903.2.9.

Portable or part-time STOP or YIELD signs shall not be used except for emergency and temporary traffic control zone purposes.

A portable or part-time (folding) STOP sign that is manually placed into view and manually removed from view shall not be used during a power outage to control a signalized approach unless the maintaining agency establishes that the signal indication that will first be displayed to that approach upon restoration of power is a flashing red signal indication and that the portable STOP sign will be manually removed from view prior to resuming stop-and-go operation of the traffic control signal.

Option. When a STOP sign or YIELD sign is knocked down and it is not possible to repair the assembly immediately, a temporary sign of the same likeness (STOP sign for STOP and YIELD sign for YIELD) may be installed on a portable sign support at the location until the permanent assembly can be repaired. See EPG 948 for additional information regarding Incident Response Planning.

Support. The use of STOP signs at grade crossings is described in EPG 913.2.4 and EPG 913.2.5.

EPG 914.2.1 contains provisions regarding the assignment of priority where a shared-use path crosses a roadway.

903.2.7 Determining the Minor Road for Unsignalized Intersections (MUTCD Section 2B.07)

Guidance. The selection of the minor road to be controlled by STOP signs should be based on one or more of the following criteria:

A. A roadway intersecting a highway,
B. A roadway with the lower functional classification,
C. A roadway with the lower traffic volume,
D. A roadway with the lower speed limit, and/or
E. A roadway that intersects with a roadway that has a higher priority for one or more modes of travel.

When two roadways that have relatively equal volumes, speeds, and/or other characteristics intersect, the following factors should be considered in selecting the minor road for installation of STOP signs:

A. Controlling the direction that conflicts the most with established pedestrian crossing activity or school walking routes;
B. Controlling the direction that has obscured vision, dips, or bumps that already require drivers to use lower operating speeds;
C. Controlling the direction that has the best sight distance from a controlled position to observe conflicting traffic; and
D. Stopping the direction that has the longest distance of uninterrupted flow approaching the intersection.

903.2.8 Right-of-Way Intersection Control Considerations (MUTCD Section 2B.08)

Guidance. Before converting to a more restrictive form of right-of-way control at an unsignalized intersection, the following alternative treatments to address safety, operational, or other concerns should be among those to be considered:

A. Where stop controlled, installing Stop Ahead signs on the appropriate approaches to the intersection;
B. Removing parking on one or more approaches;
C. Removing sight distance obstructions;
D. Installing signs along the major street to warn road users approaching the intersection;
E. Relocating the stop line(s) and making other changes to improve the sight distance at the intersection;
F. Installing measures designed to reduce speeds on the approaches;
G. Installing an Intersection Control Beacon (see EPG 902.18.2) or Stop Beacon (see EPG 902.18.5) at the intersection to supplement STOP sign control;
H. Installing a Warning Beacon (see EPG 902.18.3) on warning signs in advance of a stop-controlled intersection on major-street and/or minor-street approaches;
I. Adding one or more lanes on a minor-street approach to reduce the number of vehicles per lane on the approach;
J. Revising the geometrics at the intersection to channelize vehicular movements and reduce the time required for a vehicle to complete a movement, which could also assist pedestrians;
K. Revising the geometrics at the intersection to add pedestrian median refuge islands and/or curb extensions;
L. Installing roadway lighting if a disproportionate number of crashes occur at night;
M. Restricting one or more turning movements on a full-time or part-time basis if alternate routes are available;
N. Installing on the major street a pedestrian-actuated device: Warning Beacon (see EPG 902.18.3), rectangular rapid-flashing beacon (see EPG 902.12.1), or In-Roadway Warning Lights (see EPG 902.20), if pedestrian safety is the major concern;
O. If the warrant is satisfied, installing all-way stop control;
P. Installing a pedestrian hybrid beacon (see EPG 902.10) on the major street to address pedestrian safety;
Q. Installing a circular intersection; and
R. Employing other alternatives, depending on conditions at the intersection.

903.2.9 Yield Control (MUTCD Section 2B.10)

Guidance. YIELD signs should be installed at an intersection when any of the following conditions apply:

A. At the second intersection of a divided highway crossing or median break functioning as two separate intersections (see Figure 903.2.41.2). In this case, a YIELD sign should be installed at the entrance to the second intersection.
B. For a channelized turn lane that is separated from the adjacent travel lanes by an island, even if the adjacent lanes at the intersection are controlled by a highway traffic control signal or by a STOP sign.
C. At an intersection where a special problem exists and where engineering judgment indicates the problem to be susceptible to correction by the use of the YIELD sign.
D. On an approach to an intersection where the only permissible movement is a right-turn movement with an intersection geometry similar to a channelized right-turn lane or an approach to a roundabout.

Support. YIELD signs are generally not to be installed at entrance ramps on MoDOT freeways or expressways where an acceleration lane is provided. The intention is for drivers to accelerate to improve merging traffic operation. YIELD signs may cause drivers to decelerate, thus negatively impacting merging traffic operation. For cloverleaf interchanges, the loop entrance ramps can result in low speeds on ramps and short weave sections. Therefore, YIELD signs are installed at cloverleaf interchanges.

Standard. YIELD signs shall be used at a cloverleaf interchange where the in-loop traffic merges with the acceleration and deceleration traffic movement.

Option. YIELD signs may be installed facing the entering roadway for a merge-type movement if engineering judgment indicates that control is needed because acceleration geometry and/or sight distance is not adequate for merging traffic operation. The design criteria contained in Section 10.9.6.5 of the “AASHTO Green Book – A Policy on Geometric Design Of Highways and Streets,” 7th Edition, 2018, AASHTO should be used to evaluate acceleration lane geometry. (See Figure 903.15.23).

Standard. A YIELD sign shall be used to require road users to yield the right-of-way to other traffic at the entrance to a roundabout. YIELD signs at roundabouts shall be used to control the approach roadways and shall not be used to control the circulatory roadway.

YIELD signs shall not be placed on all of the approaches to an intersection, except at roundabouts.

903.2.10 Minor Road Stop Control (MUTCD Section 2B.11)

Standard. All city street and county road access to the state highway system shall be controlled by a stop sign except as described in EPG 903.2.9 and EPG 902.

903.2.11 All-Way Stop Control (MUTCD Section 2B.12)

Support. The provisions in the following sections describe warrants for the recommended engineering study to determine all-way stop control. Warrants are not a substitute for engineering judgment. The fact that a warrant for a particular traffic control device is met is not conclusive justification to install or not install all-way stop control. Because each intersection will have unique characteristics that affect its operational performance or safety, it is the engineering study for a given intersection that is ultimately the basis for a decision to install or not install all-way stop control.

All-way stop controls at intersections with substantially differing approach volumes can reduce the effectiveness of these devices for all roadway users.

Guidance. The decision to establish all-way stop control at an unsignalized intersection should be based on an engineering study. The engineering study for all-way stop control should include an analysis of factors related to the existing operation and safety at the intersection, the potential to improve these conditions, and the applicable factors contained in the following all-way stop control warrants:

A. All-Way Stop Control Warrant A: Crash Experience (see EPG 903.2.12)
B. All-Way Stop Control Warrant B: Sight Distance (see EPG 903.2.13)
C. All-Way Stop Control Warrant C: Transition to Signal Control or Transition to Yield Control at a Circular Intersection (see EPG 903.2.14)
D. All-Way Stop Control Warrant D: 8-Hour Volume (Vehicles, Pedestrians, Bicycles) (see EPG 903.2.15)
E. All-Way Stop Control Warrant E: Other Factors (see EPG 903.2.16)

Standard. The satisfaction of an all-way stop control warrant or warrants shall not in itself require the installation of all-way stop control at an unsignalized intersection.

903.2.12 All-Way Stop Control Warrant A: Crash Experience (MUTCD Section 2B.13)

Option. All-way stop control may be installed at an intersection where an engineering study indicates that:

A. For a four-leg intersection, there are five or more reported crashes in a 12-month period or six or more reported crashes in a 36-month period that were of a type susceptible to correction by the installation of all-way stop control.
B. For a three-leg intersection, there are four or more reported crashes in a 12-month period or five or more reported crashes in a 36-month period that were of a type susceptible to correction by the installation of all-way stop control.

903.2.13 All-Way Stop Control Warrant B: Sight Distance (MUTCD Section 2B.14)

Option. All-way stop control may be installed at an intersection where an engineering study indicates that sight distance on the minor-road approaches controlled by a STOP sign is not adequate for a vehicle to turn onto or cross the major (uncontrolled) road.

Support. At such a location, a road user, after stopping, cannot see conflicting traffic and is not able to negotiate the intersection unless conflicting cross traffic is also required to stop.

903.2.14 All-Way Stop Control Warrant C: Transition to Signal Control or Transition to Yield Control at a Circular Intersection (MUTCD Section 2B.15)

Option. All-way stop control may be installed at locations where all-way stop control is an interim measure that can be installed to control traffic while arrangements are being made for the installation of a traffic control signal (see EPG 902.3) at the intersection or for the installation of yield control at a circular intersection.

903.2.15 All-Way Stop Control Warrant D: 8-Hour Volume (Vehicles, Pedestrians, Bicycles) (MUTCD Section 2B.16)

Option. All-way stop control may be installed at an intersection where an engineering study indicates:

A. The combined motor vehicle, bicycle, and pedestrian volume entering the intersection from the major-street approaches is at least 300 units per hour for each of any 8 hours of a typical day; and
B. The combined motor vehicle, bicycle, and pedestrian volume entering the intersection from the minor-street approaches is at least 200 units per hour for each of any of the same 8 hours.

If the 85th-percentile approach speed of the major-street traffic exceeds 40 mph, the minimum vehicular volume warrants may be reduced to 70 percent of the values given in Items A and B in the preceding paragraph.

903.2.16 All-Way Stop Control Warrant E: Other Factors (MUTCD Section 2B.17)

Option. All-way stop control may be installed at an intersection where an engineering study indicates that all-way stop control is needed due to other factors not addressed in the other all-way stop control warrants. Such other factors may include, but are not limited to, the following:

A. The need to control left-turn conflicts,
B. An intersection of two residential neighborhood collector (through) streets of similar design and operating characteristics where all-way stop control would improve traffic operational characteristics of the intersection, or
C. Where pedestrian and/or bicyclist movements support the installation of all-way stop control.

903.2.17 STOP Sign or YIELD Sign Placement (MUTCD Section 2B.18)

Standard. The STOP or YIELD sign shall be installed on the near side of the intersection on the right-hand side of the approach to which it applies. When the STOP or YIELD sign is installed at this required location and the sign visibility is restricted, a Stop Ahead sign (see EPG 903.2.29) shall be installed in advance of the STOP sign or a Yield Ahead sign (see EPG 903.2.29) shall be installed in advance of the YIELD sign.

The STOP or YIELD sign shall be located as close as practicable to the intersection it regulates, while optimizing its visibility to the road user it is intended to regulate.

STOP signs and YIELD signs shall not be mounted on the same post.

Support. EPG 903.1.5 contains information about mounting signs back-to-back with a STOP or YIELD sign.

Guidance. STOP or YIELD signs should not be placed farther than 50 feet from the edge of the pavement of the intersected roadway (see Drawing F in Figure 903.1.13).

Supplemental plaques used in conjunction with a STOP or YIELD sign should be limited to those specified for such use in the EPG.

Standard. Where drivers proceeding straight ahead must yield to traffic approaching from the opposite direction, such as at a one-lane bridge, a TO ONCOMING TRAFFIC (R1-2aP) plaque shall be mounted below the YIELD sign. See Figure 903.2.53.2 and Figure 903.2.53.3 in EPG 903.2.53.

Support. Figure 903.1.13 shows examples of some typical placements of STOP signs and YIELD signs.

EPG 903.1.13 contains additional information about separate and combined mounting of other signs with STOP or YIELD signs.

Guidance. Stop lines that are used to supplement a STOP sign should be located as described in EPG 620.2.18. Yield lines that are used to supplement a YIELD sign should be located as described in EPG 620.2.18.

Where there is a marked crosswalk at the intersection, the STOP sign should be installed in advance of the edge of the crosswalk that is nearest to the approaching traffic.

Except at roundabouts and channelized right-turn lanes, where there is a marked crosswalk at the intersection, the YIELD sign should be installed in advance of the edge of the crosswalk that is nearest to the approaching traffic.

Where two roads intersect at an acute angle, the STOP or YIELD sign should be positioned at an angle, or shielded, so that the legend is out of view of traffic to which it does not apply.

At a roundabout intersection, to prevent circulating vehicles from yielding unnecessarily, the face of the YIELD sign is not to be visible from the circulatory roadway.

If a raised splitter island is available on the left-hand side of a multi-lane roundabout approach, an additional YIELD sign should be placed on the left-hand side of the approach.

Option. If a raised splitter island is available on the left-hand side of a single-lane roundabout approach, an additional YIELD sign may be placed on the left-hand side of the approach.

At wide-throat intersections or where two or more approach lanes of traffic exist on the signed approach, an additional STOP or YIELD sign may be installed on the left-hand side of the road and/or a stop or yield line may be used to improve observance of the right-of-way control. At channelized intersections or at divided roadways separated by a median or divisional island (painted or physical), the additional STOP or YIELD sign may be placed on a channelizing island, or in the median or on the divisional island.

Standard. More than one STOP sign or more than one YIELD sign shall not be placed on the same support facing in the same direction.

903.2.18 Yield Here To Pedestrians Signs (R1-5 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.19)

R1-5
R1-5d

Support. The R1-5 series signs are intended to mitigate the scenario that can place pedestrians at risk by blocking other drivers’ view of pedestrians and by blocking the pedestrians' view of the vehicles approaching in the adjacent lanes.

Standard. Yield Here to Pedestrians (R1-5, R1-5a, R1-5c, and R1-5d) signs shall be used if yield lines are used in advance of a marked crosswalk only where it crosses an uncontrolled multi-lane approach. The legend STATE LAW shall not be displayed on the R1-5 series signs.

Guidance. If yield lines and Yield Here to Pedestrians signs are used in advance of a crosswalk that crosses an uncontrolled multi-lane approach, the signs should be placed 20 to 50 feet in advance of the nearest edge of the crosswalk (see EPG 620.2.18 and Figure 620.2.18).

Standard. When used with a School Crossing assembly within school zones (see EPG 908), the R1-5a sign shall be used in place of the R1-5 sign in accordance with the second paragraph of this article.

When used with a Trail Crossing assembly (see EPG 903.3.44), the R1-5d sign shall be used in place of the R1-5 sign in accordance with the second paragraph of this article.

Guidance. When Yield Here to Pedestrians signs are provided in advance of a crosswalk across an multi-lane approach, parking should be prohibited in the area between the yield line and the crosswalk.

Yield lines and Yield Here to Pedestrians signs should not be used in advance of crosswalks that cross an approach to or departure from a roundabout.

Option. A Pedestrian Crossing (W11-2) warning sign may be placed overhead or may be post-mounted with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque at the crosswalk location where Yield Here to Pedestrians signs have been installed in advance of the crosswalk.

Standard. If a W11-2 sign is post-mounted at the crosswalk location where a Yield Here to Pedestrians sign is used on the approach, the Yield Here to Pedestrians sign shall not be placed on the same post as the W11-2 sign.

Option. An advance Pedestrian Crossing (W11-2) warning sign with an AHEAD or a distance supplemental plaque may be used in conjunction with a Yield Here to Pedestrians sign on the approach to the same crosswalk.

In-Street Pedestrian Crossing signs and Yield Here to Pedestrians signs may be used together at the same crosswalk.

903.2.19 In-Street Pedestrian and Trail Crossing Signs (R1-6 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.20)

R1-6
R1-6d
Note: The legend STATE LAW is optional

Option. The In-Street Pedestrian Crossing (R1-6) sign, In-Street Trail Crossing (R1-6d) sign, may be used to remind road users of laws regarding right-of-way at an unsignalized crosswalk. The legend STATE LAW may be displayed at the top of the R1-6 series signs if applicable. On the R1-6 series signs, the legend YIELD may be used instead of the appropriate YIELD sign symbol.

MoDOT may develop and apply criteria for determining the applicability of In-Street Pedestrian Crossing signs.

Standard. If used, In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing signs shall only be placed in the roadway at the crosswalk location on a raised island.

The In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing sign shall not be post-mounted on the left-hand or right-hand side of the roadway.

Support. EPG 620.8.2 contains information about the use of tubular markers to provide additional emphasis for a pedestrian crossing.

Standard. When used at an uncontrolled crossing, the In-Street Pedestrian Crossing sign shall be used only as a supplement to a Pedestrian Crossing (W11-2) warning sign with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque at the crosswalk location.

When used at an uncontrolled crossing, the In-Street Trail Crossing sign shall be used only as a supplement to a Trail Crossing (W11-15) warning sign with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque at the crosswalk location.

An In-Street or Trail Crossing sign shall not be placed in advance of the crosswalk to educate road users about the State law prior to reaching the crosswalk, nor shall it be installed as an educational display that is not near any crosswalk.

Option. In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing signs may be mounted back-to-back on a raised island in the median of an undivided roadway.

Standard. The In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing sign shall not be used at crosswalks on approaches controlled by a traffic control signal, pedestrian hybrid beacon, or an emergency-vehicle hybrid beacon.

Option. The In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing sign may be used at intersections or midblock pedestrian crossings with flashing beacons.

Support. The provisions of EPG 903.1.15 concerning mounting height are not applicable for the In-Street Pedestrian Crossing sign. EPG 903.1.18 contains information about sign mounting methods.

Standard. The top of an In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing sign placed in an island shall be a maximum of 4 feet above the island surface.

Option. The In-Street Pedestrian Crossing or Trail Crossing signs may be used seasonally to prevent damage in winter because of plowing operations, and may be removed at night if the pedestrian activity at night is minimal.

903.2.20 Speed Limit Sign (R2-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.21)

R2-1

Support. In general, the maximum speed limits applicable to roads are established:

A. Statutorily – a maximum speed limit applicable to a particular class of road, such as freeways or city streets, that is established by State law; or
B. As speed zones – based on engineering studies.

State statutory limits restrict the maximum speed limit that can be established on a particular road, notwithstanding what an engineering study might indicate. Maximum speed limits in Missouri are governed by the Missouri Revised Statutes, Section 304.010.

MoDOT can establish non-statutory speed limits or designate reduced speed zones using an engineering study. Setting appropriate speed limits is especially important to ensure safety for all road users in varying types of contexts, particularly on roadways where adjacent land use suggests that trips could be served by varied modes. These situations include urban and suburban non-freeway arterials or rural arterials that serve as main streets in smaller communities, consistent with the context classifications of urban core, urban, suburban, and rural towns found in “A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets,” 2018 Edition, AASHTO. When setting a speed limit, a range of factors such as land-use context, pedestrian and bicyclist activity, crash history, intersection spacing, driveway density, roadway geometry, roadside conditions, roadway functional classification, traffic volume, and observed speeds can influence the speed limit determined in the engineering study. The engineering study will determine which of the recommended factors will prevail in setting the speed limit.

MoDOT can use speed limit setting tools and methods such as expert systems and those consistent with the safe system approach as part of the required engineering study for a non-statutory speed limit. As speed limit setting tools vary, practitioners needs to be aware of their limitations and advantages, possible variation between the tools and the need to explore gaps or weaknesses of tools, and weigh the output accordingly in consideration of setting speed limits.

To achieve desired operating speeds, agencies often implement other speed management strategies concurrently with setting speed limits, such as traffic calming measures, geometric design features, and increased enforcement. See EPG 905.2.14 for more information regarding speed limit guidelines.

Standard. Speed zones (other than statutory speed limits) shall only be established on the basis of an engineering study that has been performed in accordance with traffic engineering practices. The engineering study shall consider the roadway context.

Guidance. Among the factors that should be considered when conducting an engineering study for establishing or reevaluating speed limits within speed zones are the following:

A. Roadway environment (such as roadside development, number and frequency of driveways and access points, and land use), functional classification, public transit volume and location or frequency of stops, parking practices, and pedestrian and bicycle facilities and activity;
B. Roadway characteristics (such as lane widths, shoulder condition, grade, alignment, median type, and sight distance);
C. Geographic context (such as an urban district, rural town center, non-urbanized rural area, or suburban area), and multi-modal trip generation;
D. Reported crash experience for at least a 12-month period;
E. Speed distribution of free-flowing vehicles including the pace, median (50th-percentile), and 85th-percentile speeds; and
F. A review of past speed studies to identify any trends in operating speeds.

When the 85th-percentile speed is appreciably greater than the posted speed limit, and the roadway context does not support setting a higher speed limit, the engineering study should consider whether changes to geometric features, enforcement, and/or other speed-reduction countermeasures might improve compliance with the posted speed limit. A similar approach should be used if the results of past speed studies indicate that the 85th-percentile speed has consistently increased.

On urban and suburban arterials, and on rural arterials that serve as main streets through developed areas of communities, the 85th-percentile speed should not be used to set speed limits without consideration of all factors described in the first Guidance paragraph of this article.

On a freeway, expressway, or rural highway (outside urbanized locations or conditions), the speed limit that is posted within a speed zone should be within 5 mph of the 85th-percentile speed of free-flowing motor-vehicle traffic under the following conditions:

A. All factors described in the first Guidance paragraph of this article have been considered and determined to be non-mitigating, and
B. The measures described in the second Guidance paragraph of this article have been considered to the extent practicable.

See EPG 905.2.14 for additional information regarding setting speed limits

MoDOT should conduct engineering studies to reevaluate non-statutory speed limits on segments of their roadways that have undergone significant changes since the last review (such as changes to roadway context, the addition or elimination of parking or driveways, changes in the number of travel lanes, changes in the configuration of bicycle lanes, changes to road geometrics, changes in traffic control signal coordination, or significant changes in traffic volumes).

Speed studies for signalized intersection approaches should be taken outside the influence area of the traffic control signal, which is generally considered to be approximately ½ mile, to avoid obtaining skewed results for the speed distribution. If the signal spacing is less than 1 mile, the speed study should be at approximately the middle of the segment.

Standard. The Speed Limit (R2-1) sign shall display the limit established by law, ordinance, regulation, or as adopted by the authorized agency based on an engineering study. The speed limits displayed shall be in multiples of 5 mph.

Speed Limit (R2-1) signs, indicating speed limits for which posting is required by law, shall be located at the points of change from one speed limit to another.

At the downstream end of the section to which a particular speed limit applies, a Speed Limit sign showing the next speed limit shall be installed.

Speed Limit signs indicating the statutory speed limits shall be installed at entrances to Missouri and at city limits, where appropriate.

Guidance. Additional Speed Limit signs should be installed beyond interchanges and major intersections and at other locations where it is necessary to remind road users of the speed limit that is applicable.

Speed Limit signs should not be located at curves or other locations where the legal speed limit is greater than the safe operating speed. If Speed Limit signs are installed on the same sign supports and above a City Limit sign, the sign supports should be sized to properly support both signs.

The following are recommended locations for posting a Speed Limit sign:

A. Downstream from all acceleration ramps on the freeway/expressway system, posted after the route confirmation marker, if space allows;
B. Downstream from major intersections such as state system junctions, signalized intersections, and major county road junctions;
C. Where it is necessary to remind road users of the speed limit that is applicable;
D. In each direction of travel for road users leaving the Interstate system onto a state route. The sign should be located, if practical, approximately 400 ft. beyond the route confirmation assembly. If the crossroad is not located on the state system, the proper jurisdiction should be notified; or
E. When the speed limit is reduced on the freeway/expressway, an additional sign should be posted in the median.

Support. The “Traffic Control Devices Handbook – 2nd Edition, 2013, ITE.” contains suggested criteria on the spacing of speed limit signs.

EPG 903.3.32 contains information about the use of speed zone signs to inform road users of a reduced or variable speed zone to provide advance notice to comply with the posted speed limit ahead.

Option. If a W3-5b sign is posted to provide notice of a variable speed zone, an END VARIABLE SPEED LIMIT (R2-13) sign may be installed at the downstream end of the zone to provide notice to road users of the termination of the speed zone.

Advance traffic control warning signs (see EPG 903.2.29), intersection warning signs (see EPG 903.3.33), and/or other traffic control devices are appropriate warning prior to a signalized intersection. A Speed Limit sign should not be used for this purpose.

Guidance. An advisory speed plaque (see EPG 903.3.59) mounted below a warning sign should be used to warn road users of an advisory speed for a roadway condition. A Speed Limit sign should not be used for this purpose.

Option. A variable speed limit sign that changes the speed limit for traffic and ambient conditions may be installed provided that the appropriate speed limit is displayed at the proper times and locations in accordance with the third and fourth Guidance paragraphs of this article.

Standard. The variable speed limit sign legend “SPEED LIMIT” shall be a black legend on a white retroreflective background. The variable speed limit legend shall be displayed in white LEDs on an opaque black background.

Support. EPG 903.3.13 contains information about the use of a Vehicle Speed Feedback plaque mounted below a Speed Limit sign that displays to approaching drivers the speed at which they are traveling.

Advisory speed signs and plaques are discussed in EPG 903.3.12 and 903.3.59. Temporary traffic control zone speed signs are discussed in EPG 616. The WORK ZONE (G20-5aP) plaque intended for installation above a Speed Limit sign is discussed in EPG 616.7.7. School Speed Limit signs are discussed in EPG 908.2.5. 

903.2.21 Combined Maximum and Minimum Speed Limits Sign (R2-4a) (MUTCD Section 2B.24)

R2-4a

Standard. Combined Maximum and Minimum Speed Limits (R2-4a) signs shall be installed only on interstate routes in lieu of Speed Limit (R2-1) signs to designate the maximum and minimum speed limits that apply.

Guidance. The Combined Maximum and Minimum Speed Limits sign should be located in the same manner as Speed Limit signs (See EPG 903.2.9). Additionally, the R2-4a sign should be installed on interstate routes at entrances to Missouri and where interstate routes cross county lines.

903.2.22 Speed Limit XX Except Where Posted Sign (R2-5d)

R2-5d

Standard. The SPEED LIMIT XX EXCEPT WHERE POSTED (R2-5d) sign shall be installed only at locations where it has been requested and is required by an enabling ordinance.

Guidance. The SPEED LIMIT XX EXCEPT WHERE POSTED sign should be placed immediately to the right of the City Limit sign on its own post.

Option. The SPEED LIMIT XX EXCEPT WHERE POSTED sign may be used on all state highways and outer roads except the Interstate system.

903.2.23 Higher Fines Signs and Plaque (MUTCD Section 2B.25)

Support. See EPG 907.3 for information on Travel Safe Zones.

903.2.24 Movement Prohibition Signs (R3-1 through R3-4, R3-18, and R3-27) (MUTCD Section 2B.26)

R3-1
R3-2
R3-3
R3-4
R3-18
R3-27

Standard. Movement Prohibition signs shall be installed where specific movements are prohibited at an intersection approach except as provided in the second Option and fourth Standard paragraphs of this article.

Support. Missouri Statute 304.341, which governs U-turn Movements at signalized intersections, states: It shall be unlawful for the driver of any vehicle to turn such vehicle so as to proceed in the opposite direction at any intersection controlled by a traffic signal or police officer; nor shall such turn be made at any place unless the movement can be made in safety and without interfering with other traffic.

Missouri Statute 304.120 allows municipalities, by ordinance, to make additional rules of the road or traffic regulations to meet their needs and traffic conditions, which would allow U-turn Movements to be permitted at certain unsignalized intersections.

Guidance. Movement Prohibition signs should only be used to prohibit a turn or through movement from an entire approach and should not be used to designate movements that are required or permitted from a specific lane or lanes on a multi-lane approach.

Movement Prohibition signs should be placed where they will be most easily seen by road users who might be intending to make the movement.

If a No Right Turn (R3-1) sign is used, at least one should be placed either over the roadway or at a right-hand corner of the intersection.

If a No Left Turn (R3-2) sign is used, at least one should be placed over the roadway, at the far left corner of the intersection, on a median, or in conjunction with the STOP sign or YIELD sign located on the near right corner.

Except as provided in Item C of the third Standard paragraph of this article for signalized locations, if a NO TURNS (R3-3) sign is used, two signs should be used, one at a location specified for a No Right Turn sign and one at a location specified for a No Left Turn sign.

If a No U-Turn (R3-4) sign or a combination No U or Left Turn (R3-18) sign is used, at least one should be used at a location specified for a No Left Turn sign.

The No U-Turn sign (R3-4) should be used sparingly and only where a specific problem has been documented and not as standard practice for median breaks. If used, these signs should be placed at or between intersections to indicate where U-turns are prohibited.

If both left turns and U-turns are prohibited, the combination No U or Left Turn (R3-18) sign should be used instead of separate R3-2 and R3-4 signs.

Standard. The No U-Turn sign shall be installed above the AUTHORIZED AND EMERGENCY VEHICLES ONLY (R5-29) sign (See EPG 903.2.36).

Support. EPG 903.2.25 through EPG 903.2.28 contain information regarding lane control signs that indicate the required or permitted movements from individual lanes.

Guidance. If a No Straight Through (R3-27) sign is used, at least one should be placed either over the roadway or at a location where it can be seen by road users who might be intending to travel straight through the intersection.

If turn prohibition signs are installed in conjunction with traffic control signals:

A. The No Right Turn sign should be installed adjacent to a signal face viewed by road users in the right-hand lane.
B. The No Left Turn (or No U-Turn or combination No U or Left Turn) sign should be installed adjacent to a signal face viewed by road users in the left-hand lane.
C. A NO TURNS sign should be placed adjacent to a signal face viewed by all road users on that approach, or two signs should be used.

Option. If turn prohibition signs are installed in conjunction with traffic control signals, an additional turn prohibition sign may be post-mounted to supplement the sign mounted overhead.

Where ONE WAY signs are used (see EPG 903.2.40), No Left Turn and No Right Turn signs may be omitted.

Where the movement restriction applies to certain vehicle classes, signs incorporating a supplementary legend, modified as appropriate, may be used to indicate the specific vehicle class restriction or exception. When the movement restriction applies during certain time periods only, the following Movement Prohibition signing alternatives may be used and are listed in order of preference:

A. A blank-out or changeable message sign (see Chapter 2L) that displays the prohibited movement only during the time that the movement prohibition is applicable, especially at signalized intersections.
B. Permanently-mounted signs incorporating a supplementary legend showing the hours and days during which the prohibition is applicable. Contact the Highway Safety and Traffic Division for the design of supplementary legends and plaques.
C. Portable signs, installed by proper authority, located off the roadway at each corner of the intersection. The portable signs are only to be used during the time that the movement prohibition is applicable.

Standard. The blank-out part-time electronic-display Movement Prohibition sign shall consist of a red circle and diagonal with a white prohibited movement on an opaque black background.

Option. Movement Prohibition signs may be omitted at a ramp entrance to an expressway or a channelized intersection where the design is such as to indicate clearly the one-way traffic movement on the ramp or turning lane.

Standard. The No Left Turn (R3-2) sign, the No U-Turn (R3-4) sign, and the combination No U or Left Turn (R3-18) sign shall not be used at approaches to roundabouts to prohibit drivers from turning left onto the circulatory roadway of a roundabout.

Support. At roundabouts, the use of R3-2, R3-4, or R3-18 signs to prohibit left turns onto the circulatory roadway might confuse drivers about the possible legal turning movements around the roundabout. ONE WAY (R6-1 or R6-2) signs are appropriate to indicate the travel direction within a roundabout.

903.2.25 Intersection Lane Control Signs (R3-5 through R3-8) (MUTCD Section 2B.27)

Standard. Intersection Lane Control signs, if used, shall require road users in certain lanes to turn, shall permit turns from a lane where such turns would otherwise not be permitted, shall require a road user to stay in the same lane and proceed straight through an intersection, or shall indicate permitted movements from a lane.

Intersection Lane Control signs shall not be used in lieu of turn prohibition signs, such as No Right-Turn (R3-1).

Support. Intersection Lane Control signs have three applications:

A. Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-5 series and R3-7 series) signs,
B. Optional Movement Lane Control (R3-6 series) signs, and
C. Advance Intersection Lane Control (R3-8 series) signs.

Guidance. When Intersection Lane Control signs are mounted overhead, each sign used should be placed over the lane or a projection of the lane to which it applies.

On signalized approaches where through lanes that become mandatory turn lanes, multiple-lane turns that include shared lanes for through and turning movements, ramps with two or more lanes or other lane-use regulations are present that would be unexpected by unfamiliar road users, overhead Intersection Lane Control signs should be installed approximately 250 ft. in advance of the stop bar over the appropriate lanes. A one-arm cantilever tubular truss to support these signs should be used to eliminate an obstacle on one side of the roadway.

Option. A signal mast arm design (without signal head) may be used to mount Intersection Lane Control signs, which allows a longer arm than standard one or two arm tubular sign supports. The upright post may be placed on either side of the roadway, and if possible, placed so that roadway geometrics draw traffic away from the post and footing.

Guidance. The Left Only (R3-5L) sign should be installed on the back side of the mast arms over the left turn lanes where practical.

Where overhead mounting on the approach is impracticable for the Advance and/or Intersection Lane Control signs, one of the following alternatives should be employed:

A. At locations where through lanes become mandatory turn lanes, a Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-7) sign should be post-mounted on the left-hand side of the roadway where a through lane is becoming a mandatory left-turn lane on a one-way street or where a median of sufficient width for the signs is available, or on the right-hand side of the roadway where a through lane is becoming a mandatory right-turn lane.
B. At locations where a through lane is becoming a mandatory left-turn lane on a two-way street where a median of sufficient width for the signs is not available, and at locations where multiple-lane turns that include shared lanes for through and turning movements are present, an Advance Intersection Lane Control (R3-8 series) sign should be post-mounted in a prominent location in advance of the intersection, and consideration should be given to the use of an oversized version in accordance with Table 903.2.3.

Use of an overhead sign for one approach lane should not require installation of overhead signs for the other lanes of that approach.

Option. Intersection Lane Control signs may be omitted where:

A. A turn bay has been provided by physical construction or pavement markings, and
B. Only the road users using such turn bays are permitted to make a turn in that direction.

Standard. Except as provided in the last paragraph of this article, at roundabouts, Intersection Lane Control (R3-5, R3-6, and R3-8 series) signs shall display curved-stem arrow symbols as shown in Figure 903.2.25.

Option. Normal-stem arrow symbol options may be displayed on Intersection Lane Control (R3-5, R3-6, and R3-8 series) signs at roundabouts where they more effectively indicate road geometry based on engineering judgment.

Figure 903.2.25 Intersection Lane Control Signal Arrow Options for Roundabouts

903.2.26 Mandatory Movement Lane Control Signs (R3-5, R3-5a, and R3-7) and Plaques (MUTCD Section 2B.28)

R3-5
R3-5a
R3-7L
R3-7R

Standard. Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-5, R3-5a, and R3-7) signs, if used, shall indicate only the single vehicle movement that is required from the lane.

The Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-5 and R3-5a) symbol signs shall include the legend ONLY and shall be mounted overhead over the specific lanes to which they apply (see EPG 903.2.25). The R3-7 sign shall be for post-mounting only. The R3-7 sign shall not be mounted at the far side of the intersection.

If used, the Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-7) sign shall be located in advance of the intersection, such as near the upstream end of the mandatory movement lane, and/or at the near side of the intersection where the regulation applies.

The use of the Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-7) word message sign shall be limited to only locations where through lanes approaching an intersection become mandatory turn lanes.

Mandatory Movement Lane Control Signs shall not be used on roadways with speed limits 50 mph or greater. Contact Highway Safety and Traffic Division for alternatives when speed limits are 50 mph or greater.

Guidance. Mandatory Movement Lane Control signs should be accompanied by lane-use arrow markings, especially where traffic volumes are high, where there is a high percentage of commercial vehicles, or where other distractions exist.

Option. The Through Only (R3-5a) sign may be used to require a road user in a particular lane to proceed straight through an intersection.

On an approach to a mandatory turn lane where traffic regularly enters the shoulder to access the turn lane inappropriately, creating safety or operational issues, a DO NOT DRIVE ON SHOULDER (R4-17) sign (see EPG 903.2.35) may be used to supplement the standard Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-5 and/or R3-7 series) signs.

903.2.27 Optional Movement Lane Control Signs (R3-6 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.29)

R3-6
R3-6a
R3-6b

Standard. Optional Movement Lane Control (R3-6, R3-6a and R3-6b) signs, if used, shall be used for two or more movements from a specific lane or to emphasize permitted movements. The Optional Movement Lane Control sign shall be mounted overhead over the specific lane to which it applies.

If used, the Optional Movement Lane Control signs shall indicate all permissible movements from specific lanes.

Because more than one movement is permitted from the lane, the word message ONLY shall not be used on an Optional Movement Lane Control sign.

Optional Movement Lane Control signs shall be used for two or more movements from a specific lane where a movement, not allowed by State statute or local ordinance, is permitted.

The Optional Movement Lane Control signs shall not be used alone to effect a turn prohibition.

Guidance. If used, the Optional Movement Lane Control sign should be located overhead in advance of the intersection, such as near the upstream end of an adjacent mandatory movement lane, and/or overhead at the intersection where the regulation applies.

903.2.28 Advance Intersection Lane Control Signs (R3-8 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.30)

R3-8
R3-8a
R3-8b
R3-8xa
R3-8xb
R3-8xc

Option. Advance Intersection Lane Control (R3-8, R3-8a, and R3-8b) signs may be used to indicate the configuration of all lanes ahead.

The word message ONLY or the bicycle symbol, may be used within the border in combination with the arrow symbols of the R3-8 sign series.

Where a bicycle lane is between two general-purpose lanes the R3-8 series signs may be modified to show the bicycle lane with a white legend on a black background in accordance with designs of the R3-8x series signs (see EPG 914.2.2).

Guidance. When used, an Advance Intersection Lane Control sign should be placed at an adequate distance in advance of the intersection, either along the lane tapers or at the beginning of the turn lane so that road users can select the appropriate lane.

Option. An Advance Intersection Lane Control sign may be repeated closer to the intersection along the approach for additional emphasis.

Standard. An Advance Intersection Lane Control (R3-8 series) sign shall not be mounted at the far side of an intersection to which it applies.

Where three or more approach lanes are available to traffic, Advance Intersection Lane Control (R3-8 series) signs, if used, shall be post-mounted in advance of the intersection and shall not be mounted overhead.

903.2.29 Two-Way Left-Turn-Only Signs (R3-9a and R3-9b) and Plaques (MUTCD Section 2B.32)

R3-9a
R3-9b

Support. Missouri Statute 300.215, which governs two-way left turn lane movements states:

Designated two-way left turn lanes: Where a special lane for making left turns by drivers proceeding in opposite directions have been indicated by official traffic control devices:

A. A left turn shall not be made from any other lane;
B. A vehicle shall not be driven in the lane except when preparing for or making a left turn from or into the roadway or when preparing for or making a U-turn when otherwise permitted by law;
C. A vehicle shall not be driven in the lane for a distance more than five hundred feet.

Standard. Two-Way Left Turn Only (R3-9a) signs shall be used for overhead installation only. Center Lane Only (R3-9b) signs shall be post mounted installations.

Guidance. A Two-Way Left-Turn-Only (R3-9a or R3-9b) sign should be used in conjunction with the required pavement markings where a non-reversible lane is reserved for the exclusive use of left-turning vehicles in either direction and is not used for passing, overtaking, or through travel.

Option. The post-mounted R3-9b sign may be used as an alternate to or a supplement to the overhead R3-9a sign

Additional R3-9b signs may be installed after major intersections, or in situations that require additional emphasis of the proper use of this lane.

Support. Signing is especially helpful to drivers in areas where the two-way left-turn-only maneuver is new, in areas subject to environmental conditions that frequently obscure the pavement markings, and on peripheral streets with two-way left-turn-only lanes leading to an extensive system of routes with two-way left-turn-only lanes.

903.2.30 Jughandle Signs (R3-23, R3-24, R3-25, and R3-26 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.35)

Guidance. There are limited cases where these signs are applicable to the MoDOT system. Any use of these signs requires authorization from the Highway Safety and Traffic Division.


903.2.31 DO NOT PASS Sign (R4-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.36)

R4-1

Option. The DO NOT PASS (R4-1) sign may be used in addition to pavement markings (see EPG 620.2.3) to emphasize the restriction on passing. The DO NOT PASS sign may be used at one-lane bridges and work zones. Any other use of this sign requires authorization from the Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

Support. Standards for determining the location and extent of no-passing zone pavement markings are set forth in EPG 620.2.3.

Standard. PASS WITH CARE (R4-2) signs shall be used in conjunction with the DO NOT PASS sign.

903.2.32 PASS WITH CARE Sign (R4-2) (MUTCD Section 2B.37)

R4-2

Guidance. The PASS WITH CARE (R4-2) sign should be installed at the downstream end of a no-passing zone if a DO NOT PASS sign has been installed at the upstream end of the zone.

Standard. The PASS WITH CARE sign shall be the same size and shall be erected in the same manner as the DO NOT PASS (R4-1) sign.

903.2.33 KEEP RIGHT EXCEPT TO PASS Sign (R4-16) and SLOWER TRAFFIC KEEP RIGHT Sign (R4-3) (MUTCD Section 2B.38)

R4-3
R4-16

Option. The KEEP RIGHT EXCEPT TO PASS (R4-16) sign may be used on roadways where there are two lanes in one direction of travel to direct drivers to stay in the right-hand lane except when they are passing another vehicle.

Guidance. If used, the KEEP RIGHT EXCEPT TO PASS sign should be installed at or just beyond the beginning of a two-lane section of roadway and at selected locations along two-lane roadways where additional emphasis is needed.

Option. The SLOWER TRAFFIC KEEP RIGHT (R4-3) sign may be used on multi-lane through roadways to improve capacity or reduce unnecessary lane changing due to the presence of slower vehicles that impede the normal flow of traffic.

Standard. The SLOWER TRAFFIC KEEP RIGHT (R4-3) sign shall be required for climbing lanes.

Guidance. If used, the SLOWER TRAFFIC KEEP RIGHT sign should be installed at or just beyond the beginning of a multi-lane roadway section or at the beginning of an extra lane provided for trucks and/or other slow-moving traffic, and at selected locations where there is a tendency on the part of some road users to drive in the left-hand lane(or lanes) below the normal speed of traffic. These signs should not be used on the approach to an interchange or through an interchange area where traffic is entering or exiting, or along deceleration or acceleration lanes.

If an extra lane has been provided for trucks and other slow-moving traffic, a Lane Ends sign (see EPG 903.3.39) should be installed in advance of the point where the extra lane ends. Appropriate pavement markings should be installed at both the upstream and downstream ends of the extra lane (see EPG 620.2.14 and Figure 620.2.14 ).

903.2.34 Keep Right and Keep Left Signs (R4-7 Series and R4-8 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.39)

R4-7
R4-7a
R4-7b
R4-7c
R4-8
R4-8a
R4-8b
R4-8c

Option. The Keep Right (R4-7) sign may be used at locations where it is necessary for traffic to pass only to the right-hand side of a roadway feature or obstruction. The Keep Left (R4-8) sign may be used at locations where it is necessary for traffic to pass only to the left-hand side of a roadway feature or obstruction.

Guidance. At locations where it is not readily apparent that traffic is required to keep to the right, a Keep Right sign should be used.

Standard. If Keep Right signs are installed at the start of a median or at a median opening, they shall be placed as close as practicable to the approach ends of the medians, and shall be visible to traffic on the divided highway.

Guidance. If used, the Keep Right sign should be mounted on the face of or just in front of a pier or other obstruction separating opposite directions of traffic in the center of the highway such that traffic will have to pass to the right-hand side of the sign.

Where the approach end of the island channelizes traffic away from the approach direction, the word legend (R4-7a, R4-7b, R4-8a, or R4-8b) signs should be used instead of the symbol (R4-7 or R4-8) signs to emphasize the degree of curvature away from the approach direction (see Figure 903.2.34.1 ).

Where a two-lane, two-way highway transitions to a divided highway, the KEEP RIGHT (R4-7b) sign should be installed within 50 ft. of the gore point, if possible. The edge of the sign should be a minimum of 6 ft. from the curb or shoulder point.

Standard. The Keep Right (Left) sign shall not be installed on the right-hand (left-hand) side of the roadway in a position where traffic must pass to the left-hand (right-hand) side of the sign.

Option. The Keep Right sign may be omitted at intermediate ends of divisional islands and medians.

A narrow Keep Right (R4-7c) sign may be installed on the approach end of a median island that is less than 4 feet wide at the point where the sign is to be located.

Standard. A narrow Keep Right (R4-7c) sign shall not be installed on a median island that has a width of 4 feet or more at the point where the sign is to be located.

Option. The Keep Right sign may be installed in the median of a divided highway crossing that functions as a single intersection such that it is visible to traffic on the divided highway as shown in Figure 903.2.41.3 and Figure 903.2.41.4 .

Support. EPG 903.2.40 provides more information about the use of the Keep Right sign in combination with or in lieu of ONE-WAY signs at divided highway crossings.

Standard. The KEEP RIGHT (R4-7b) sign shall be installed as close to the median nose as possible where an undivided highway transitions into a divided highway.

Figure 903.2.34.1 Examples of Keep Right and Keep Left Sign Placement (Sheet 1 of 2)

Figure 903.2.34.2 Examples of Keep Right and Keep Left Sign Placement (Sheet 2 of 2)

903.2.35 DO NOT DRIVE ON SHOULDER Sign (R4-17) (MUTCD Section 2B.43)

R4-17

Option. The DO NOT DRIVE ON SHOULDER (R4-17) sign may be installed to inform road users that using the shoulder of a roadway as a travel lane is prohibited.

Guidance. The DO NOT DRIVE ON SHOULDER (R4-17) sign should be considered for special conditions if there is a need determined by district traffic engineering staff. The sign should be considered as a temporary tool to aid in the enforcement of the condition. After it appears the problem has been corrected, these signs should be removed.

Support. The R4-17 sign is to be used only where necessary. MoDOT does not want to set driver expectations for general use of this sign.

903.2.36 Selective Exclusion Signs and Plaques (MUTCD Section 2B.45)

R5-2
R5-2aP
R5-25
R5-29

Option. Selective Exclusion signs may be used to provide notice to road users that State or local statutes or ordinances exclude designated types of traffic from using particular roadways or facilities.

Standard. Selective Exclusion signs shall clearly indicate the type of traffic that is excluded.

Support. Typical exclusion messages include:

A. No Trucks (R5-2),
B. No Pedestrian Crossing (R9-3),
C. EXCEPT LOCAL DELIVERY (R5-2aP) plaque.
D. NO VENDING (R5-24)
E. NO FISHING FROM BRIDGE (R5-25)
F. AUTHORIZED AND EMERGENCY VEHICLES ONLY (R5-29)

Guidance. If an exclusion is governed by vehicle weight, a Weight Limit sign (see EPG 903.2.53) should be used instead of a Selective Exclusion sign.

The Selective Exclusion sign should be placed on the right-hand side of the roadway at an appropriate distance from the intersection so as to be clearly visible to all road users turning into the roadway that has the exclusion. The No Pedestrian Crossing (R9-3) sign (see EPG 903.2.46) should be installed so as to be clearly visible to pedestrians who are at a location where an alternative route is available.

Option. The No Pedestrian Crossing (R9-3) sign may also be used at underpasses or elsewhere where pedestrian facilities are not provided.

The EXCEPT LOCAL DELIVERY (R5-2aP) plaque may be mounted below the R5-2 sign.

The NO VENDING (R5-24) sign may be used at locations where vending is taking place within the right-of-way.

Standard. When used, the NO FISHING FROM BRIDGE (R5-25) sign shall be mounted at or near the bridge ends.

Option. The NO FISHING FROM BRIDGE (R5-25) sign may be used at locations where fishing from a bridge creates a safety hazard.

Guidance. The AUTHORIZED AND EMERGENCY VEHICLES ONLY (R5-29) sign should be used at emergency crossovers to prohibit vehicles from using the emergency crossover unless they have special permission (such as law enforcement vehicles or emergency vehicles) or are performing official business (such as highway agency vehicles).

The No U Turn sign should be installed above the AUTHORIZED AND EMERGENCY VEHICLES ONLY sign.

Signing for both directions of traffic should be provided on one post with the signs being installed 90 degrees to the roadway. The signs should be mounted back to back. The post should be located approximately in the middle of the median. If median width is greater than 60 ft., consideration should be given to install separate signs.

903.2.37 DO NOT ENTER Sign (R5-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.46)

R5-1

Standard. The DO NOT ENTER (R5-1) sign shall be used at the following locations:

A. Where a two-way roadway becomes a one-way roadway;
B. The intersection of an interchange exit ramp with a crossroad as specified in EPG 903.2.39 (see Figure 903.2.39.1);
C. The intersection of a channelized or turning roadway with a two-way undivided crossroad; and
D. Except as provided in the fourth paragraph of this article, an intersection with a divided highway (see Figure 903.2.37).

If the DO NOT ENTER sign is mounted behind a STOP or YIELD sign:

A. 36 x 36 inch DO NOT ENTER sign shall be used behind a 48 x 48 inch STOP sign; and
B. 30 x 30 inch. DO NOT ENTER sign shall be used behind a 60 x 60 inch YIELD sign.

Guidance. A DO NOT ENTER sign should be installed at other locations where additional emphasis is needed where wrong-way movements are prominent or where the intersecting angle of roadways is such that the visibility of ONE WAY signs alone does not sufficiently convey the restriction.

Option. A DO NOT ENTER sign may be omitted on a low-speed urban street that is a divided highway at a crossing that functions as two separate intersections.

Guidance. The DO NOT ENTER sign, if used, should be placed directly in view of a road user at the point where a road user could wrongly enter a divided highway, one-way roadway, or ramp. The sign should be mounted facing traffic that might enter the roadway or ramp in the wrong direction.

At a crossing with a divided highway; the sign, if used, should be placed on the outside edge side of the roadway facing traffic that might enter the roadway in the wrong direction.

If the DO NOT ENTER sign would be visible to traffic to which it does not apply, the sign should be turned away from, or shielded from, the view of that traffic.

A second DO NOT ENTER sign should be used, particularly where traffic approaches from an intersecting roadway (Figure 903.2.37).

EPG 903.1.12 contains the provisions for the use of continuously-operated or actuated LEDs to enhance the conspicuity of signs.

Figure 903.2.37 Locations of DO NOT ENTER and WRONG WAY Signing for Divided Highway Crossings that Function as Two Separate Intersections

903.2.38 WRONG WAY Sign (R5-1a) (MUTCD Section 2B.47)

R5-1a

Option. The WRONG WAY (R5-1a) sign may be used as a supplement to the DO NOT ENTER sign where a crossroad intersects a one-way roadway in a manner that does not physically discourage or prevent wrong-way entry (see Figure 903.2.37).

Guidance. If used, the WRONG WAY sign should be placed at a location along the one-way roadway farther from the crossroad than the DO NOT ENTER sign (see EPG 903.2.37).

The WRONG WAY sign should be placed on the same side of the road as the DO NOT ENTER sign.

Support. EPG 903.1.12 contains the provisions for the use of continuously-operated or actuated LEDs to enhance the conspicuity of signs.

903.2.39 Wrong-Way Traffic Control at Interchange Ramps (MUTCD Section 2B.48)

Standard. At interchange exit ramp terminals where the ramp intersects a crossroad in such a manner that wrong-way entry could inadvertently be made, the following signs shall be used (see Figure 903.2.39.1):

A. At least one ONE WAY sign for each direction of travel on the crossroad shall be placed where the exit ramp intersects the crossroad.
B. At least one DO NOT ENTER sign shall be conspicuously placed near the downstream end of the exit ramp in positions appropriate for full view of a road user starting to enter wrongly from the crossroad.
C. At least one WRONG WAY sign shall be placed on the exit ramp facing a road user traveling in the wrong direction.

Guidance. In addition, the following pavement markings should be used (see Figure 903.2.39.1):

A. On two-lane paved crossroads at interchanges, solid double yellow lines should be used as a center line for an adequate distance on both sides approaching the ramp intersections.
B. Where crossroad channelization or ramp geometrics do not make wrong-way movements difficult, a lane-use arrow should be placed in each lane of an exit ramp near the crossroad terminal where it will be clearly visible to a potential wrong-way road user.

Option. The following traffic control devices may be used to supplement the signs and pavement markings described in the first and second paragraphs of this article:

A. Additional ONE WAY signs may be placed, especially on two-lane rural crossroads, appropriately in advance of the ramp intersection to supplement the required ONE WAY sign(s).
B. Additional WRONG WAY signs may be used.
C. Slender, elongated wrong-way arrow pavement markings (see Figure 620.2.22.1) intended primarily to warn wrong-way road users that they are traveling in the wrong direction may be placed upstream from the ramp terminus (see Figure 903.2.39.1 ) to indicate the correct direction of traffic flow. Wrong-way arrow pavement markings may also be placed on the exit ramp at appropriate locations near the crossroad junction to indicate wrong-way movement.
D. Lane-use arrow pavement markings may be placed on the exit ramp and crossroad near their intersection to indicate the permissive direction of flow.
E. Lane control signs or movement prohibition signs may be used on the approaches to the exit ramp.
D. A Keep Right (R4-7 or R4-7c) may be used on a ramp median nose for wrong-way traffic control.

Guidance. On interchange entrance ramps where the ramp merges with the through roadway and the design of the interchange does not clearly make evident the direction of traffic on the separate roadways or ramps, a ONE WAY sign visible to traffic on the entrance ramp and through roadway should be placed on each side of the through roadway near the entrance ramp merging point.

Option. On interchange entrance ramps where the ramp merges with the through roadway and the design of the interchange does not clearly make evident the direction of traffic on the separate roadways or ramps a No Left Turn (R3-2) sign may be located on the left-hand side of the entrance ramp at the gore. If a No Left Turn (R3-2) sign is located on the left-hand side, a supplemental R3-2 sign may be installed on the right-hand side of the entrance ramp.

On interchange entrance ramps where the ramp merges with the through roadway and the design clearly indicates the direction of flow, a ONE WAY sign may be placed visible to traffic on the entrance ramp and/or a NO TURNS (R3-3) sign may be placed visible to traffic on the entrance ramp and through roadway at the gore area.

Support. EPG 903.2.37, EPG 903.2.38, and EPG 903.2.40 contain further information on signing to avoid wrong-way movements at at-grade intersections on expressways.

Figure 903.2.39.1. Example of Application of Regulatory Signing and Pavement Markings at an Exit Ramp Termination to Deter Wrong-Way Entry

Figure 903.2.39.2. Locations of Wrong-Way signing for Divided Highways with Offset Left Turn Lanes

Notes:
  1. Distances may be adjusted up to 20’ +/- based on engineering judgement
  2. 4”x72” red sign post delineators are optional
  3. MoDOT maintained signs shall not be installed on the back of non-MoDOT maintained signs
  4. See Figure 903.2.41.4 for ONE WAY signing for Divided Highways with Offset Left Turn Lanes

903.2.40 ONE WAY Signs (R6-1 and R6-2) (MUTCD Section 2B.49)

R6-1
R6-2

Standard. Except as provided in the sixth paragraph of this article, the ONE WAY (R6-1 or R6-2) sign shall be used to indicate streets or roadways upon which vehicular traffic is allowed to travel in one direction only.

ONE WAY signs shall be placed parallel to the one-way street at all alleys and roadways that intersect one-way roadways.

At the crossing of a roadway with a divided highway that functions as two separate intersections, ONE WAY signs shall be placed, visible to each crossroad approach, on the near right and far left corners of each intersection with the directional roadways (see Figures 903.2.41.1 and 903.2.41.2).

At the crossing of a roadway with a divided highway that functions as a single intersection Keep Right (R4-7) signs (see EPG 903.2.34) and/or ONE WAY signs shall be installed (see Figure 903.2.41.3 and Figure 903.2.41.4). If Keep Right signs are installed, they shall be placed as close as practicable to the approach ends of the medians and shall be visible to traffic on the divided highway as shown in Figure 903.2.41.3 and Figure 903.2.41.4. If ONE WAY signs are installed, they shall be placed on the near right and far left corners of the intersection and shall be visible to each crossroad approach.

Option. At the crossing of a roadway with a divided highway, regardless of function as a single or separate intersections, ONE WAY signs may also be placed on the far right corner of the intersection as shown in Figure 903.2.41.1, Figure 903.2.41.2, Figure 903.2.41.3 and Figure 903.2.41.4.

ONE WAY signs may be omitted on the one-way roadways of divided highways, where the design of interchanges indicates the direction of traffic on the separate roadways.

Support. EPG 903.2.39 contains information for the placement of ONE WAY signs at a crossroad with an interchange.

Standard. If used at unsignalized intersections with one-way streets, ONE WAY signs shall be placed on the near right and the far left corners of the intersection facing traffic entering or crossing the one-way street.

If used at signalized intersections with one-way streets, ONE WAY signs shall be placed near the appropriate signal faces, on the poles holding the traffic signals, on the mast arm or span wire holding the signals, or at the locations specified for unsignalized intersections.

At unsignalized T-intersections where the roadway at the top of the T-intersection is a one-way roadway, ONE WAY signs shall be placed on the near-right and the far side of the intersection facing traffic on the stem approach.

ONE WAY (R6-2) signs may be used in lieu of ONE WAY (R6-1) signs on mast arms for signals or where lateral space is limited.

Where the central island of a roundabout allows for the installation of signs, ONE WAY signs may be used to direct traffic counter-clockwise around the central island (see Figure 903.2.40.2 and Figure 903.2.40.3).

Guidance. Where used on the central island of a roundabout, the mounting height of a ONE WAY sign should be at least 4 feet, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way.

Figure 903.2.40.1 Example of Regulatory and Warning Signs for a Mini-Roundabout

Figure 903.2.40.2 Example of Regulatory and Warning Signs for a One-Lane Roundabout

Figure 903.2.40.3 Example of a Regulatory and Warning Signs for a Two-Lane Roundabout with Consecutive Double lefts

903.2.41 Divided Highway Crossing Signs (R6-3 and R6-3a) (MUTCD Section 2B.50)

R6-3
R6-3a

Standard. On unsignalized minor-street approaches from which both left turns and right turns are permitted onto a divided highway at a crossing that functions as two separate intersections (see EPG 903.1.23), a Divided Highway Crossing (R6-3 or R6-3a) sign shall be used to advise road users that they are approaching an intersection with a divided highway (see Figure 903.2.41.1 and Figure 903.2.41.2).

If a Divided Highway Crossing sign is used at a four-leg intersection, the R6-3 sign shall be used. If used at a T-intersection, the R6-3a sign shall be used.

The Divided Highway Crossing sign shall be located on the near right corner of the intersection, mounted beneath a STOP or YIELD sign or on a separate support.

The DIVIDED HIGHWAY (R6-3b) sign may be used in situations where the R6-3 or R6-3a Divided Highway Crossing signs may be confusing.

Figure 903.2.41.1 ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Median Widths Greater than 150 Feet

Figure 903.2.41.2 ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Median Widths of 60 Feet to 150 Feet

Figure 903.2.41.3 ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Median Widths Narrower Than 60 Feet

Figure 903.2.41.4 ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Offset Left Turn Lanes

903.2.42 Parking, Standing, and Stopping Signs (R7 and R8 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.52)

Support. Parking signs pertain to the parking, standing, and stopping of vehicles along the roadway and in designated parking areas. They cover a wide variety of regulations, and only general guidance can be provided here. The word “standing” when used on the R7 and R8 series of signs refers to the practice of a driver keeping the vehicle in a stationary position while continuing to occupy the vehicle. The word “stopping” when used on the R7 and R8 series signs refers to any vehicle, occupied by a driver or not, that stops other than to avoid conflict with other traffic or to comply with official direction. Other types of activities such as active loading, active passenger loading, and/or waiting might be established in State or local codes for use on R7 and R8 series signs.

Parking signs are categorized as either (1) prohibiting parking or (2) permitting parking with restrictions on how parking is allowed.

The types of parking, standing, or stopping prohibitions that might be encountered include, but are not limited to:

A. Prohibited at all times;
B. Prohibited only at certain times of the day and/or days of the week;
C. Prohibited with exceptions, such as for bus stops, loading/unloading zones, persons with disabilities, or electric vehicle charging stations; or
D. Prohibited under certain conditions, such as Snow Emergency Routes.

Permissive parking signs allowing parking with restrictions include, but are not limited to:

A. Parking only allowed for limited time duration (such as 30 minutes or for 1 hour);
B. Metered parking requiring payment at an individual or a multi-space parking meter, or through electronic means such as by telephone or mobile application.;
C. Parking only for specific persons (such as those with disabilities or patrons or employees of a business) or specific vehicle types (such as electric vehicles, police/government vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles, or taxis);
D. Angled or back-in angled parking when it is not commonly used in the area;
E. Parking programs such as neighborhood/residential permits, school areas, or special events; and
F. Emergency parking or stopping only.

The District Engineer is authorized to act on requests for parking restrictions within incorporated areas upon receipt of a city ordinance requesting the same.

Option. The District Engineer may authorize parking restrictions after completion of a study by the district staff and review by county and local law enforcement.

Within interchange areas and on ramps the standard NO PARKING ANYTIME (R7-1) sign may be used.

Guidance. Local law enforcement agencies should be consulted when determining if there is a need for no parking signs to be installed.

903.2.43 Design of Parking, Standing, and Stopping Signs (MUTCD Section 2B.53)

R7-1
R7-108
R7-111
R7-111a
R7-112
R7-112a
R7-112b
R7-113
R7-113aP
R7-113bP
R7-114a
R7-114b
R7-201P
R7-202P
R7-5
R7-8
R7-8aP
R7-35

Standard. Parking, standing, or stopping signs shall be rectangular.

Public agencies shall follow established law (State law, local ordinance, or regulation) as adopted by the authorized agency regarding what messages are allowed on parking signs.

The legend on parking signs shall state applicable regulations. Parking signs shall comply with the standards of shape, color, and location.

Prohibitive parking signs shall be used where parking is prohibited at all times or at specific times. Except as otherwise provided in this article, parking signs shall have a red legend and border on a white background and, when the parking prohibition symbol is used, the symbol “P” shall be black.

Permissive parking signs shall be used where only time-limited parking or parking in a particular manner is allowed. Permissive parking signs shall have a green legend and border on a white background.

Guidance. Parking information, should be displayed from top to bottom of the sign, as applicable, in the following order:

A. The restriction or prohibition;
B. The times of the day that it is applicable, if not all hours;
C. The days of the week that it is applicable, if not every day;
D. Qualifying or supplementary information;
E. Exemptions to the restriction of prohibition; and
F. Any tow-away message or symbol.

If the parking regulation applies to a limited area or zone, the limits of the regulation should be shown by arrows or supplemental plaques. If arrows are used and if the sign is at the end of a parking zone, there should be a single-headed arrow pointing in the direction that the regulation is in effect. If the sign is at an intermediate point in a zone, there should be a double-headed arrow pointing both ways. When a single sign is used at the transition point between two parking zones, it should display a right arrow and a left arrow pointing in the direction that the respective regulations apply.

Standard. The times and days for which the parking regulations are in effect shall be posted if they are not in effect at all times of day or all days of the week.

Option. As an alternate to the use of arrows to show designated restriction zones, the following word messages may be used: BEGIN, END, HERE TO CORNER, HERE TO ALLEY, and THIS SIDE OF SIGN.

Standard. Where parking spaces are reserved for persons with disabilities, the Accessible Parking (R7-8) sign shall be used to designate the space and shall display the official International Symbol of Accessibility.

Where parking spaces that are reserved for persons with disabilities are designed to accommodate wheelchair vans, a VAN ACCESSIBLE (R7-8aP) plaque shall be mounted below the R7-8 sign.

The RESERVED PARKING for Persons with Disabilities (R7-8) sign shall be installed in rest area parking lots 10 ft. to 16 ft. from the edge of the handicap ramp.

Support. The R7-8L has a left arrow and the R7-8R a right arrow. The R7-8 does not have an arrow.

Guidance. Where parking spaces are designated for parking of electric vehicles, an Electric Vehicle Parking (R7-111 series, R7-112 series, and R7-113) sign should be installed adjacent to the designated spaces. Where there is no time limit, the R7-111 series sign should be used. Where parking is subject to a time limit, the R7-112 series sign should be used.

Where parking spaces are only designated for charging of electric vehicles, an R7-113 sign or R7-114 series sign should be installed adjacent to the designated spaces.

Where additional restrictions apply while a vehicle occupies the designated space, the R7-113P series plaques should be installed below the R7-113 sign or the R7-114 series signs.

Option. A Tow-Away Zone (R7-201P or R7-201aP) plaque may be mounted below any parking prohibition sign. The word legend TOW-AWAY ZONE may be incorporated into the parking prohibition sign in lieu of using a separate plaque.

The R7-201P plaque may have a black or red symbol and border on a white background.

Guidance. When a legend other than that on the standard parking signs is necessary, letter height, symbol size, and basic sign layout should be consistent with the those shown on the standard parking signs as detailed in the FHWA “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)).

In general, the letter height of the principal legend on parking signs sized for urbanized applications should be at least 2 inches.

The NO PARKING ON BRIDGE sign (R7-35) should be used at bridge ends or on bridges where motorists tend to block or endanger through traffic by parking on the bridge.

903.2.44 Placement of Parking, Standing, and Stopping Signs (MUTCD Section 2B.54)

Support. The efficacy of parking, standing, and stopping signs, when used on conventional roads in urbanized or developed environments, depends on their visibility and consistent placement along a street or within a particular block. It is often impracticable for the entire legend to be legible from similar distances as for other types of signs. Therefore, it is important that their conventional form be recognizable from an adequate distance such that the road user can obtain the information upon closer inspection.

Guidance. When signs with arrows are used to indicate the extent of the restricted zones, the signs should be set at an angle of not less than 30 degrees nor more than 45 degrees with the line of traffic flow in order to be visible to approaching traffic.

When signs are placed at the head of perpendicular parking stalls, the signs should be parallel to the roadway facing the parking stall.

Spacing of signs should be based on legibility, conspicuity, and sign orientation.

If the zone is long, signs should be used at intermediate points within the zone.

If the signs are mounted at an angle of 90 degrees to the curb line, two signs should be mounted back to back at the transition point between two parking zones, each with an appended THIS SIDE OF SIGN (R7-202P) supplemental plaque.

If the signs are mounted at an angle of 90 degrees to the curb line, signs without any arrows or appended plaques should be used at intermediate points within a parking zone, facing in the direction of approaching traffic. Otherwise, the standards of placement should be the same as for signs using directional arrows.

Option. Blanket parking regulations that apply to an entire jurisdiction may, if legal, be posted in the vicinity of the jurisdictional boundary lines. Blanket parking regulations that apply to a posted zone or district may, if legal, be posted at the entry points to the zone or district.

903.2.45 Emergency Restriction Signs (R8-7) (MUTCD Section 2B.55)

R8-7

Standard. Emergency Restriction signs shall be rectangular and shall have a black legend and border on a white background.

Option. The EMERGENCY STOPPING ONLY (R8-7) sign may be used to discourage or prohibit shoulder parking on the interstate and other freeway highway systems based on the Missouri Revised Statutes, Section 304.024.

Guidance. The use of the EMERGENCY STOPPING ONLY sign should be held to a minimum and not erected unless there is a specific problem.

Support. EPG 913.2.7 contains information for the use of the DO NOT STOP ON TRACKS (R8-8) sign to discourage or prohibit parking or stopping on railroad or light rail transit tracks.

903.2.46 Pedestrian Crossing Signs (R9-3) (MUTCD Section 2B.57)

R9-3
R9-3a

Option. Pedestrian Crossing signs may be used to limit pedestrian crossing to specific locations.

Standard. If used, Pedestrian Crossing signs shall be installed to face pedestrian approaches.

Option. The No Pedestrian Crossing (R9-3) sign may be used to prohibit pedestrians from crossing a roadway at an undesirable location or in front of a school or other public building where a crossing is not designated.

The NO PEDESTRIAN CROSSING (R9-3a) word message sign may be used as an alternate to the R9-3 symbol sign.

Support. Pedestrians with vision disabilities might need features other than traffic control devices to provide effective communication of the prohibition of pedestrian crossing.

903.2.47 Traffic Signal Pedestrian and Bicyclist Actuation Signs (R10-3b, R10-3d, R10-3e, R10-4, and R10-25) (MUTCD Section 2B.58)

R10-3b
R10-3d
R10-3e
R10-4
R10-25

Standard. Where manual actuation of a traffic signal is required for pedestrians or bicyclists to call a signal phase to cross the roadway, traffic signal signs applicable to pedestrian actuation or bicyclist actuation shall be mounted immediately above or incorporated into the push button detector units (see EPG 902.9.5).

Support. Traffic signal signs applicable to pedestrians include:

A. Push Button for Walk Signal (R10-3 series), and
B. Push Button for Green Signal (R10-4 series).

Option. If the signalized intersection has push buttons but no pedestrian heads the PUSH BUTTON FOR GREEN SIGNAL (R10-4) sign may be used instead of the R10-3e and R10-3j signs.

Guidance. The finger in the push button symbol on the R10-4 sign should point in the same direction as the arrow on the sign.

Option. Where symbolic pedestrian signal indications are used, an educational sign (R10-3b) may be used at signalized intersections. The R10-3d educational sign may be used to inform pedestrians that the pedestrian clearance time is sufficient only for the pedestrian to cross to the median at locations where pedestrians cross in two stages using a median refuge island. The R10-3e educational sign may be used where countdown pedestrian signals have been provided.

The R10-3e sign shall be used with pre-timed pedestrian signals. For actuated pedestrian signal, the R10-3eL and R10-3eR shall be mounted immediately above or incorporated in pedestrian pushbutton units.

The R10-25 sign may be used where a push button detector has been installed for pedestrians to activate In-Roadway Warning Lights (see EPG 902.20) or flashing beacons that have been added to the pedestrian warning signs.

903.2.48 Traffic Signal Signs and Plaques (R10-5 through R10-23a) (MUTCD Section 2B.59)

R10-5
R10-6
R10-7
R10-10
R10-12
R10-12a
R10-13
R10-14
R10-14a
R10-14b
R10-15
R10-23
R10-23a

Option. To supplement traffic signal control, traffic signal (R10-5 through R10-30) signs may be used to regulate road users.

Traffic signal signs may be installed at certain locations to clarify signal control. Among the legends that may be used for this purpose are:

A. LEFT (RIGHT) ON GREEN ARROW ONLY (R10-5),
B. STOP HERE ON RED (R10-6) for observance of stop lines,
C. DO NOT BLOCK INTERSECTION (R10-7) for avoidance of traffic obstructions,
D. LEFT (RIGHT) TURN SIGNAL (R10-10),
E. U TURN SIGNAL (R10-10a) for exclusive control of a U-turn movement,
F. LEFT (RIGHT) TURN YIELD ON GREEN (symbolic circular green) (R10-12), and
G. LEFT (RIGHT) TURN YIELD ON FLASHING YELLOW ARROW (R10-12a).

Guidance. If used, the LEFT ON GREEN ARROW ONLY sign, the LEFT TURN SIGNAL sign, the LEFT TURN YIELD ON GREEN (symbolic circular green) sign, or the LEFT TURN YIELD ON FLASHING YELLOW ARROW sign should be located adjacent to the left-turn signal face.

Standard. The LEFT TURN SIGNAL (R10-10L) sign has been discontinued by MoDOT. These signs shall remain in place until the circular red indication is replaced with a red left arrow (see EPG 902.6.6 Signal Indications for Protected Only Mode Left-Turn Movements in a Separate Signal Face).

If an existing R10-10L is at the end of its service life, it shall be removed, and the circular red indication shall be replaced with a red left arrow.

Guidance. If used, the RIGHT ON GREEN ARROW ONLY sign, the RIGHT TURN SIGNAL sign, or the RIGHT TURN YIELD ON FLASHING YELLOW ARROW sign should be located adjacent to the right-turn signal face.

Option. If used, a U TURN SIGNAL (R10-10a) sign may be installed adjacent to the signal face that exclusively controls a U-turn movement.

Standard. The CROSSWALK—STOP ON RED (symbolic circular red) (R10-23) and STOP ON RED-YIELD ON FLASHING RED AFTER STOP (R10-23a) signs shall only be used in conjunction with pedestrian hybrid beacons (see EPG 902.10.2).

The EMERGENCY SIGNAL (R10-13) sign shall be used in conjunction with emergency-vehicle traffic control signals (see EPG 902.13.2).

The EMERGENCY SIGNAL—STOP ON FLASHING RED (R10-14 or R10-14a) sign shall be used in conjunction with emergency-vehicle hybrid beacons (see EPG 902.14.2).

Option. If needed for extra emphasis, a STOP HERE ON FLASHING RED (R10-14b) sign may be installed with an emergency-vehicle hybrid beacon.

Standard. The Left Turn Yield to Bicycles (R10-12b) sign shall be limited to applications where the conflicting bicyclist movement would be unexpected in direction, location, or similar condition that would tend to violate the expectation of a turning motorist.

Guidance. The Left Turn Yield to Bicycles sign should be located adjacent to the left-turn signal face.

Currently the R10-12b sign is not used by MoDOT. Contact the Highway Safety and Traffic division when considering the use of this sign.

Where conditions might warrant additional emphasis to drivers turning at a signalized intersection where potential pedestrian conflicts might not be readily apparent, a Turning Vehicles Yield to Pedestrians (R10-15) sign may be used.

The R10-15 series signs, where used, should be placed as follows:

A. On the near right corner of the signalized intersection for right-turning vehicles.
B. On the far left corner of the signalized intersection for the left-turning vehicles onto a two-way street.
C. On the near left corner of the signalized intersection for left-turning vehicles from a one-way street onto a one-way street.

903.2.49 No Turn on Red Signs (R10-11 and R10-30a) (MUTCD Section 2B.60)

R10-11

Standard. Where a right turn on a circular red signal indication (or a left turn on a circular red signal indication from a one-way street to a one-way street) is to be prohibited, a NO TURN ON RED (R10-11) word message sign shall be used.

The NO TURN ON RED (R10-11) sign shall be used to prohibit a right turn on red.

Guidance. If used, the No Turn on Red sign should be installed near the appropriate signal head.

A No Turn on Red sign should be considered when an engineering study finds that one or more of the following conditions exists:

A. Inadequate sight distance to vehicles approaching from the left (or right, if applicable);
B. Geometrics or operational characteristics of the intersection that might result in unexpected conflicts;
C. An exclusive pedestrian or bicycle phase;
D. An unacceptable number of conflicting pedestrian movements with right-turn-on-red maneuvers, especially involving children, older pedestrians, or persons with disabilities;
E. More than three right-turn-on-red crashes reported in a 12-month period for the particular approach; or
F. The skew angle of the intersecting roadways creates difficulty for drivers to see traffic approaching from their left (or right, if applicable).

Standard. If an R10-11 sign with conventional road size as shown in Table 903.2.3 is used on an approach on the far side of the intersection and the distance between the stop line and the sign is greater than 120 feet, then a duplicate sign shall be located on the near side of the intersection to supplement the sign on the far side of the intersection.

Except as provided by the option below, if right turn on red (RTOR) is restricted, then the NO TURN ON RED (R10-11) sign shall be used in lieu of the RIGHT TURN SIGNAL sign.

Guidance. If used, the NO TURN ON RED sign should mounted adjacent to the far right signal indication. Refer to EPG 902.6.13 to determine when a NO TURN ON RED sign should be considered.

Option. Where space is limited, the square-shaped NO TURN ON RED (R10-11b) sign may be used instead of the R10-11 sign.

When a no-turn-on-red restriction applies during certain time periods only, the following alternatives may be used:

A Movement Prohibition (R3-1, R3-2, R3-4, R3-18, and R3-27) signs or NO TURN ON RED signs displayed by using a blank-out sign for the time period or one or more portion(s) of a particular cycle of the traffic control signal during which the prohibition is applicable; or

White LEDs may be used in the border and activated during periods of turn prohibition to enhance the sign conspicuity.

A RIGHT TURN ON RED MUST YIELD TO U-TURN (R10-30) sign may be installed to remind road users that they must yield to conflicting U-turn traffic on the street or highway onto which they are turning right on a red signal after stopping.

A RIGHT TURN MUST YIELD TO U-TURN (R10-30a) sign may be installed under a yield sign to remind road users that they must yield to conflicting U-turn traffic on the street or highway on to which they are turning right controlled by a yield sign.

903.2.50 Ramp Metering Signs (R10-28 and R10-29) (MUTCD Section 2B.61)

R10-28
R10-29

Option. When ramp control signals (see EPG 902.16) are used to meter traffic on a freeway or expressway entrance ramp, regulatory signs with legends appropriate to the control may be installed adjacent to the ramp control signal faces.

For entrance ramps with only one controlled lane, an XX VEHICLE(S) PER GREEN (R10-28) sign may be used to inform road users of the number of vehicles that are permitted to proceed during each short display of the green signal indication. For entrance ramps with more than one controlled lane, an XX VEHICLE(S) PER GREEN EACH LANE (R10-29) sign may be used to inform road users of the number of vehicles that are permitted to proceed from each lane during each short display of the green signal indication.

Support. EPG 903.12 contains provisions for the use of blank-out or changeable message signs when the metering is limited by time, day, or condition.

903.2.51 KEEP OFF MEDIAN Sign (R11-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.62)

R11-1

Option. The KEEP OFF MEDIAN (R11-1) sign may be used to prohibit driving into or parking on the median.

Guidance. The KEEP OFF MEDIAN sign should be installed on the left-hand side of the roadway within the median at random intervals as needed wherever there is a tendency for encroachment.

Support. A median is the area between two roadways of a divided highway measured from edge of travel way to edge of travel way or the area between a highway and an outer road.

903.2.52 ROAD CLOSED Sign (R11-2) and LOCAL TRAFFIC ONLY Signs (R11-3 and R11-4) (MUTCD Section 2B.63)

R11-2
R11-3
R11-4

Guidance. The ROAD CLOSED (R11-2) sign should be installed where roads have been closed to all traffic (except authorized vehicles).

ROAD CLOSED—LOCAL TRAFFIC ONLY (R11-3) or ROAD CLOSED TO THRU TRAFFIC (R11-4) signs should be used where through traffic is not permitted, or for a closure some distance beyond the sign, but where the highway is open for local traffic up to the point of closure.

Standard. The Road Closed (R11-2, R11-3, and R11-4) signs shall be designed as horizontal rectangles. These signs shall be preceded by the applicable Advance Road Closed warning sign with the secondary legend AHEAD and, if applicable, an Advance Detour warning sign (see EPG 616.8.4).

903.2.53 Weight Limit Sign (R12-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.64)

R12-1

Support. In 2022, a new load posting policy was implemented by MoDOT in the EPG. This new policy resulted from a plan of corrective action with FHWA. With this new policy, all structures on the national bridge inventory will be categorized under this new policy within the next 10 years. There are 10,387 structures on the state system. 270 of these structures are major or unusual structures and these will be categorized over the next 10 years. The remaining 10,117 structures consist of 6,940 normal bridges and 3,177 culverts. The normal bridges will be categorized in the next 4 years and the culverts will be reviewed in the last 3 years of the 10 year timeline of the plan. The R12-1 sign remains in use, with the remaining MoDOT bridge posting signs being replaced by one of three new bridge posting signs in this article.

Standard. Weight limit signs shall be used to indicate a structure that has a vehicle weight restriction.

Guidance. The units shown on any weight limit sign should be tons.

Standard. Weight limit signs shall be installed in accordance with the new bridge posting classifications once completed.

A weight limit sign shall be located at the applicable structure in accordance with (see Table 903.2.53 and Figures 903.2.53.1 to 903.2.53.3).

An additional weight limit sign, with an advisory distance or directional legend, shall be located in advance of the applicable section of highway or structure so that prohibited vehicles can detour or turn around prior to the limit zone.

In commercial zones, bridges with the capacity of more the 65 tons shall not be posted, as normally loads in excess of 65 tons will not occur.

Once a bridge has been categorized, the bridge posting signs shall be updated within 30 days of the bridge posting reclassification. This includes installing the correct sign and configuring the sign locations to match the appropriate bridge posting figure (see Figures 903.2.53.1 to 903.2.53.3).

Support. If existing weight limit signs need to be replaced prior to a bridge being categorized, contact Highway Safety and Traffic Division, Signing Section, for guidance.

Table 903.2.53, Listing of Bridge Posting Categories
Statewide Legal Load Posting Gross Weight Categories
Classification Category Description Sign Verbiage Sign Figure
Normal Legal SW-1 No Posting Required N/A N/A N/A
Normal Legal SW-2 General Gross Weight Limit Weight Limit XX Tons R12-1 903.5.36.1
Normal Legal SW-3 Single Unit Vehicle Gross Weight Limit Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons R12-12 903.5.36.1
Normal Legal SW-4 Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limit Weight Limit Combination XX Tons R12-13 903.5.36.1
Normal Legal SW-5 Single Unit Vehicle and Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limits Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons Combination XX Tons R12-14 903.5.36.1

Statewide Legal Load Posting Centerline Restriction with Gross Weight Categories
Classification Category Description Sign Verbiage Sign Figure
Lane Restricted LR-1 Lane Restriction Only N/A N/A 903.5.36.3
Lane Restricted LR-2 Lane Restriction with General Gross Weight Limit Weight Limit XX Tons R12-1 903.5.36.2
Lane Restricted LR-3 Lane Restriction with Single Unit Vehicle Gross Weight Limit Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons R12-12 903.5.36.2
Lane Restricted LR-4 Lane Restriction with Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limit Weight Limit Combination XX Tons R12-13 903.5.36.2
Lane Restricted LR-5 Lane Restriction with Single Unit Vehicle and Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limits Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons Combination XX Tons R12-14 903.5.36.2

Commercial Zone Areas Gross Weight Categories
Classification Category Description Sign Verbiage Sign Figure
Commercial Zone CZ-1 No Posting Required N/A N/A N/A
Commercial Zone CZ-2 General Gross Weight Limit Weight Limit XX Tons R12-1 903.5.36.1
Commercial Zone CZ-3 Single Unit Vehicle Gross Weight Limit Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons R12-12 903.5.36.1
Commercial Zone CZ-4 Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limit Weight Limit Combination XX Tons R12-13 903.5.36.1
Commercial Zone CZ-5 Single Unit Vehicle and Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limits Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons Combination XX Tons R12-14 903.5.36.1

Other Miscellaneous Load Posting Categories
Classification Category Description Sign Verbiage Sign Figure
Fire Truck FT-1 General Gross Weight Limit for Emergency Vehicles Included in the FAST Act, Federal Reauthorization Bill Weight Limit XX Tons R12-1 903.5.36.1
Closed Bridge K-CD Closed to All Traffic N/A N/A N/A
Closed Bridge K-CIF Closed to All Traffic as the Result of a Critical Inspection Finding N/A N/A N/A
Other OT-1 For Local Agency Bridges that have Signage that Doesn't Fit the Normal Legal, Lane Restricted, or Commercial Zone Categories N/A N/A N/A

A horizontal segment of roadway is shown. The middle of the roadway segment is illustrated to be crossing a bridge. The centerline of the roadway is a single dashed yellow line with one lane in each direction. On either side of the bridge, a WEIGHT LIMIIT SIGN is posted, facing the oncoming traffic. At the top of the figure are 4 different Weight Limit sign faces with a table below. These sign faces and the table are to help indicate what sign type and size to use at the beginning of a bridge crossing. The signs faces included in the table are R12-1, R12-12, R12-13, and R12-14.
Figure 903.2.53.1 Weight Limit Restrictions

A horizontal segment of roadway is shown. The middle of the roadway segment is illustrated to be crossing a bridge. The centerline of the roadway is a double solid yellow line with one lane in each direction. Multiple sign faces are shown at varying distances on either side of the brdige, facing ocoming traffic. These signs include a W5-3, W12-1, W3-2, and a R1-2 sign. At the top of the figure are 4 different Weight Limit sign faces with a table below. These sign faces and the table are to help indicate what sign type and size to use at the beginning of a bridge crossing. The signs faces included in the table are R12-1, R12-12, R12-13, and R12-14. There is a note to "See EPG 903.3.72 for placement of Type 3 Object Markers" in the bottom right corner of the figure.
Figure 903.2.53.2 One Lane Bridge Weight and Width Restrictions

A horizontal segment of roadway is shown. The middle of the roadway segment is illustrated to be crossing a bridge. The centerline of the roadway is a double solid yellow line with one lane in each direction. Multiple sign faces are shown at varying distances on either side of the brdige, facing ocoming traffic. These signs include a W5-3,, W3-2, and a R1-2 sign. There is a note to "See EPG 903.3.72 for placement of Type 3 Object Markers" in the bottom right corner of the figure.
Figure 903.2.53.3 One Lane Bridge Width Restrictions

903.2.54 Weigh Station Sign (R13 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.65)

R13-11
R13-15P
R13-16

Standard. The BUSES WEIGH sign (R13-11) should be used at all weigh stations to supplement the standard weigh station signing.

Guidance. The OPEN-CLOSED plaque (R13-15P) should be installed below all WEIGH STATION RIGHT LANE signs whenever an automatic OPEN-CLOSED sign has not been provided.

The BEFORE PULLING ON SCALE (R13-16) sign should be installed just to the right of the weigh scale and immediately in front thereof. A 30 in. STOP sign should be mounted above the sign.

903.2.55 TRUCK ROUTE Sign (R14-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.66)

R14-1

Guidance. The TRUCK ROUTE (R14-1) sign should be used to mark a route that has been designated to allow truck traffic.

903.2.56 Photo Enforced Signs and Plaques (R10-18a and R10-19P) (MUTCD Section 2B.69)

R10-18a
R10-19P

Option. A Signal Ahead (W3-3) sign and a Traffic Signal Photo Enforced (R10-18a) sign may be used on the same approach provided that they are on separate supports.

A Photo Enforced (R10-19P) plaque may be mounted below a regulatory sign to advise road users that the regulation is being enforced by photographic equipment.

Standard. The Traffic Signal Photo Enforced (R10-18a) sign shall be used on approaches to signalized locations where red-light cameras are present.

The Traffic Signal Photo Enforced (R10-18a) sign shall not be installed on approaches to signalized locations where red-light cameras are not present on any of the approaches to the signalized location.

A Traffic Signal Photo Enforced (R10-18a) sign shall not be installed on the same support in combination with a Signal Ahead (W3-3) sign.

If used below a regulatory sign, the Photo Enforced (R10-19P) plaque shall be a rectangle with a black legend and border on a white background.

Support. For more information about photo enforcement requirements, see EPG 950.

903.2.57 STATE LAW MOVE OVER OR SLOW DOWN FOR STOPPED EMERGENCY VEHICLES Sign (R16-25) (MUTCD Section 2B.71)

R16-25

Support. The STATE LAW MOVE OVER OR SLOW DOWN FOR STOPPED EMERGENCY VEHICLES (R16-25) sign is used to inform motorists of Missouri Revised Statutes 304.022, which requires motorists to drive with caution when approaching stopped emergency vehicles.

Guidance. The STATE LAW MOVE OVER OR SLOW DOWN FOR STOPPED EMERGENCY VEHICLES sign should be installed on Interstates entering the state at the state line. The location of the sign should be as close to the state line as possible and placed at the discretion of MoDOT.

Option. Additional STATE LAW MOVE OVER OR SLOW DOWN FOR STOPPED EMERGENCY VEHICLES signs may be installed on U.S. routes entering the state where there are no adjacent interstates and rest areas at the request of the Missouri State Highway Patrol.

Standard. Requests for additional signs shall be forwarded to the appropriate district engineer for approval. These signs shall only be installed on divided highways. The installation of this sign shall not interfere with or detract from any other regulatory, warning, or guide signs.

903.2.58 Headlight Use Signs (R16-5a) (MUTCD Section 2B.73)

Support. The HEADLIGHTS ON WHEN WIPERS ARE REQUIRED (R16-5a) sign, supported by RSMo 307.020 in 2004, was developed to inform motorists of the new law directing them to turn on headlights when wipers are on and during inclement weather. The use of these signs has been discontinued as the law has been in place for more than 15 years and many vehicles come equipped with headlights that turn on when wipers are activated. Existing signs are to be removed at the end of their sign life.

903.2.59 Seat Belt Symbol (MUTCD Section 2B.74)

R16-30

Guidance. The seat belt symbol should not be used alone. If used, the seat belt symbol should be incorporated into regulatory sign messages for mandatory seat belt use.

Support. The seat belt symbol is illustrated in the FHWA “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)).

Guidance. The R16-2, R16-3, R16-24, R16-27, and R16-27a seatbelt signs have been discontinued. These signs should remain in place to the end of their service life.

The STATE LAW BUCKLE UP PHONE DOWN (R16-30) sign should be installed at the end of the on ramp of rest areas and Missouri Welcome Centers on the interstate system. The STATE LAW BUCKLE UP PHONE DOWN (R16-30a) sign should be installed on Interstate and U.S. Routes at the state line entering Missouri. Neither sign should be installed at any other location along a roadway.

Support. A growing number of cities and counties are passing local ordinances to make seat belt usage a primary law in their communities. To promote the use of seat belts a PRIMARY SEAT BELT CITY / COUNTY - ORDINANCE sign may be installed by MoDOT upon request.

Standard. If a city/county has an established primary seat belt ordinance, MoDOT will install PRIMARY SEAT BELT CITY / COUNTY - ORDINANCE signs upon request once a copy of the ordinance has been received. When the PRIMARY SEAT BELT CITY / COUNTY - ORDINANCE is installed they shall be mounted to the right of the city limit sign or the entering county line sign.

Option. If insufficient space is available to mount the assembly to the right of these signs, the assembly shall be installed 200 ft. downstream of the city limit or county line signs at the appropriate sign spacing.

903.2.60 Barricades (MUTCD Section 2B.75)

Option. Barricades may be used to mark any of the following conditions:

A. The end of a roadway,
B. A ramp or lane that is closed for operational purposes, or
C. The permanent or semi-permanent closure or termination of a roadway.

Standard. When used to warn and alert road users of the terminus of a roadway, other than in temporary traffic control zones, barricades shall meet the design criteria of EPG 616.11.7 for a Type 3 Barricade, except that the colors of the stripes shall be retroreflective white and retroreflective red.

Option. An end-of-roadway marker or markers may be used as described in EPG 903.3.73.

Guidance. Appropriate advance warning signs (see EPG 903.3) should be used.

903.2.61 NO PARKING ALL TRAILERS AND TRUCKS OVER 6 TONS (R7-36)

R7-36

Standard. NO PARKING ALL TRAILERS AND TRUCKS OVER 6 TONS (R7-36) signs shall be placed in each commuter parking lot. A sign shall be installed at or near each entrance of the commuter parking lot.

Support. This parking restriction is necessary because commuter lots have been used by commercial trailers and trucks for extended periods of parking.

903.2.62 STOP FOR SCHOOL BUS SIGN (R16-26)

Standard. The STOP FOR SCHOOL BUS (R16-26) sign has been discontinued. MoDOT shall no longer provide STOP FOR SCHOOL BUS (R16-26) signs. Existing STOP FOR SCHOOL BUS (R16-26) signs shall be left in place until they reach the end of their service life.

903.2.63 Other Regulatory Signs

Option. Regulatory word message signs other than those classified and specified in the EPG and the federal Standard Highway Signs and Markings book may be developed to aid the enforcement of other laws or regulations.

Except for symbols on regulatory signs, minor modifications in the design may be permitted provided that the essential appearance characteristics are met.

Standard. Special regulatory signs shall be approved by the State Highway Safety and Traffic Engineer.

903.2.64 Engine Brake Muffler Required Signing

R5-23

History. MoDOT once had a NOISE ORDINANCE ENFORCED policy which was developed to address cities’ requests to install NO JAKE BRAKE signing. These requests were generated when a community experienced excessive noise related to improperly installed/operated engine braking systems on commercial vehicles. Jake brakes, or engine braking systems, are safety features of commercial vehicles. MoDOT was not willing to post signs on state routes which prohibited the use of these safety devices. However, to address the increasing requests for signing, MoDOT did permit the installation of NOISE ORDINANCE ENFORCED signs if a city passed an appropriate ordinance. This program was replaced with the current ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLERS REQUIRED signing in January 2022. This change was designed to address shortcomings of the noise ordinance signing program, which included difficulty in enforcing a noise level and noise ordinances which did not contain language relevant to engine braking noise levels. The current program is based on the direction other states have taken, focusing on the physical equipment on a commercial vehicle which can be more easily inspected and evaluated for deficiencies. This signing program is also targeting the primary concern of excessive noise from engine braking.

Support. Commercial vehicles are commonly equipped with an engine braking system. These systems supplement the vehicle’s mechanical brakes aiding in slowing these heavy vehicles safely. These safety systems, when not properly installed, can create excessive noise which many communities find objectionable. MoDOT does not permit regulatory signs which prohibit the use of these safety devices, however, the ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLERS REQUIRED signing conveys to truck drivers they must use these safety devices in an appropriate manner.

Option. If a community experiences issues with excessive noise from improperly used and installed engine braking systems on commercial vehicles, they can pass an ordinance and request MoDOT to install ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLERS REQUIRED signing at their city limit sign locations. MoDOT will install and maintain these signs with only a copy of the ordinance for our records, no fee or contract is involved. A jurisdiction can pass an ordinance specifically related to engine braking or include the language as part of another ordinance, such as a noise ordinance.

Standard. Before MoDOT will install ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLERS REQUIRED signing, a city must pass an appropriate ordinance which will be approved and kept on file by CO Highway Safety and Traffic. The ordinance shall include the following language:

Engine compression braking devices on any commercial vehicle, as defined in Missouri Revised Statute RSMo Section 301.010, may only be used within the city limits of [CITY NAME] if the truck is equipped with an adequate muffler (factory muffler or equivalent aftermarket muffler) which is properly maintained to prevent any excessive or unusual noise. If the truck’s exhaust system is equipped with a muffler cut-off, bypass, or similar device, that device shall not be activated when the engine brake is being utilized. Unmuffled engine braking system shall only be utilized within the city limits by commercial motor vehicles in emergency situations to protect life or property. Engine braking systems on rescue vehicles, city and state vehicles are exempt from this ordinance if used in the performance of official duties.

ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLER REQUIRED signing shall only be installed at the city limit location.

ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLER REQUIRED signing shall not be installed on freeways or expressways within the city limits where the posted speed limit is 45 mph or greater due to the critical need for the device at higher speeds.

Existing NOISE ORDINANCE ENFORCED signs shall be removed at the end of the signs’ service life, with no new NOISE ORDINANCE ENFORCED signs being installed after January 2022.

Individual sign installation locations can be denied by MoDOT if engineering judgement determines the prohibition would negatively impact safety, such as on long steep grades or abrupt/unexpected approaches to intersections.

Option. If the city limit on a freeway or expressway is within a posted speed limit of 45 mph or greater and the posted speed limit on that route drops to 40 mph or less, the ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLER REQUIRED sign may be installed adjacent to the speed limit sign where the speed limit drops below 45 mph.

At the end of a NOISE ORDINANCE ENFORCED sign’s life, or before, a city may request the new ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLER REQUIRED signing once the appropriate ordinance is passed.

If there is insufficient space to the right of the city limit sign to place the ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLER REQUIRED sign, it may be installed 200 ft. downstream of the city limit sign.

903.2.65 Regulatory Signs For Trash/Dumping (R5-26, R5-28)

R5-28

Standard. The NO DUMPING sign (R5-28) shall be erected only at locations where the Department of Natural Resources has given us written notice that solid waste is being disposed of on highway right of way. NO MORE TRASH signs (R5-26) are not typically installed along MoDOT roadways. NO MORE TRASH signs (R5-26) should only be installed at commuter lots, rest areas or roadside parks. NO MORE TRASH signs shall only be installed along the roadway if a major liter issue has been identified and the sign is needed for enforcement purposes. Existing NO MORE TRASH signs (R5-26) shall be left in place until they reach the end of their service life.

903.2.66 Regulation Signs For Roadside Parks and Commuter Parking Lots (R20-1)

R20-1

Support. Regulation signs are displayed at MoDOT maintained roadside parks and commuter parking lots to convey the rules and regulations pertaining to each type of facility.

Guidance. A minimum of one regulation sign should be installed at each MoDOT maintained roadside park and commuter parking lot, with the sign(s) being installed in centralized location(s) where the sign will be within normal sight of visitors once they leave their vehicles.

903.2.67 Rest Area Regulatory Signing (R20-2, R20-3, R20-4)

R20-2
R20-3
R20-4

Guidance. The REST AREA MAINTAINED BY (R20-3) sign should be installed in a prominent area along the entrance ramp to the rest area, preferably in the gore area separating truck / car traffic.

Standard. The TRUCKS-CARS (R20-4) sign shall be installed at the gore point inside the rest area to direct various vehicles to the appropriate parking lot.

A minimum of three REST AREA REGULATIONS (R20-2) signs shall be installed at each rest area.

The REST AREA MAINTAINED BY (R20-3) sign shall be installed at all rest areas to inform the public who is responsible to maintain the facility prior to the gore point.

903.2.68 Access Management Signing (R21-1 through R21-5)

Standard. ACCESS MANAGEMENT (R22-1 through R22-5) signs have been discontinued. MoDOT shall no longer provide ACCESS MANAGEMENT (R22-1 through R22-5) signs. Existing ACCESS MANAGEMENT (R22-1 through R22-5) signs shall be left in place until they reach the end of their service life.

903.2.69 Trucks and Buses 300 Ft Interval Sign (R4-30)

Standard. TRUCKS AND BUSES (R4-30) signs have been discontinued. MoDOT shall no longer provide TRUCKS AND BUSES (R4-30) signs. Existing TRUCKS AND BUSES (R4-30) signs shall be left in place until they reach the end of their service life.

903.2.70 FINES DOUBLED ENDS Sign (R2-20)

R2-20

Support. The FINES DOUBLED ENDS (R2-20) sign is not to be used on a system-wide basis. It is part of a signing package intended for special use at locations where severe crashes are occurring. There is a requirement for regional support to focus a safety campaign involving local law enforcement and public information efforts to reduce the number and severity of crashes within the travel safe zone (see EPG 907.3.2).

Standard: A FINES DOUBLED ENDS sign shall be used to mark the end of a designated travel safe zone. This sign is installed in conjunction with the TRAVEL SAFE ZONE – FINES DOUBLED (W26-1) sign.